>, ..)} \getans \endoptiongroup \mytempfalse \if\ans q\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans d\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans g\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans z\mytemptrue\fi \beginoptiongroup{COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES (if quoted title)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{bt-qq}{Quote collection and proceedings titles}{too} \optdef{x}{}{Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Sentence style}{(capitalize first word and those in braces)} \optdef{t}{atit-u}{Title style}{(just as in bib entry)} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Article title present}{in journals and proceedings} \optdef{x}{jtit-x}{No article title}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Journal names} % Abbreviated journal names normally contain periods; the periods may be % removed with this option. In fact, only letters, numbers, and spacing are % retained. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAMES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Periods in journal names}{are retained, as `Phys. Rev.'} \optdef{x}{jxper}{Dotless journal names}{as `Phys Rev'} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % Journal name is normally printed in italics; can be left in normal font. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME FONT:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Journal name italics}{} \optdef{r}{jttl-rm}{Journal name normal}{font} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Title of Theses and Technical Reports} % The title of a these (PhD or Master's) is normally treated the same % as that of a book. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of % an article. % % The title of a technical report is normally treated the same as that % of an article. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of a book. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{THESIS TITLE:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Thesis titles like books}{} \optdef{a}{thtit-a}{Thesis title like article}{} \optdef{x}{thtit-x}{No thesis title}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Tech. report title like articles}{} \optdef{b}{trtit-b}{Tech. report title like books}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Tech. report and number plain}{as `Tech. Rep. 123'} \optdef{i}{trnum-it}{Tech. report and number italic}% {as `{\string\it\space Tech. Rep. 123'}} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Journal reference} % Great diversity of opinion exists as to how a journal reference is to be % formatted. It consists of a volume, possibly a number, and page limits. % The number is really only necessary if the page numbers within one volume % start at 1 for each physical `number'. Since journals are often bound % together in one volume later, it makes more sense to number the pages % continuously through the whole volume. % % I am only aware of one journal that used to reset the pagination for each % `number', in which case the number was part of the page designation. % I had erroneously provided an option \texttt{vnum-pg} to achieve this, but I % now realize that instead, for this one journal, the database entries must % contain \texttt{pages="(2)33--2(55)"}. This option has been removed at % version 3.84. % % A number of styles for journal specifications are % \begin{quote} % \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l} % 21(2):33--55 & 21, no.\ 2: 33--55\\ % \textbf{21}(2):33--55 & \textbf{21}, \#2, 33--55\\ % \textit{21}(2), 33--55 & \textit{21} (2); 33--55 \\ % 21(2) (1995) 33--55 & 21(1995), 33-55\\ % 21(2) 33--55 & vol.~21 (2), pp.~33--55 % \end{tabular} % \end{quote} % % Here both start and stop page numbers have been given; often only the % start page is wanted. % % It is also possible to include the year as part of the journal specification, % in which case the year is always in parentheses, attached snugly or with space % to the volume, or preceding the pages. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOLUME:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Volume plain}{as vol(num)} \optdef{i}{vol-it}{Volume italic}{as {\string\em\space vol}(num)} \optdef{b}{vol-bf}{Volume bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol}(num)} \optdef{d}{vol-2bf}{Volume and number bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol(num)}} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % The form of the `number' is also given: in parentheses, with `no.', % with \#, or omitted. The \texttt{vnum-b} option is meant to be used % with \texttt{jdt-v} and \texttt{jdt-vs} but could be used alone. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Journal vol(num)}{as 34(2)} \optdef{s}{vnum-sp}{Journal vol (num)}{as 34 (2)} \optdef{c}{vnum-cm}{Journal vol, num}{as 34, 2} \optdef{n}{vnum-nr}{Journal vol, no. num}{as 34, no. 2} \optdef{h}{vnum-h}{Journal vol, \string\# number}{as 34, \string\#2} \optdef{b}{vnum-b}{Journal vol number}{as 34 2} \optdef{x}{vnum-x}{Journal vol, without number}{as 34} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{VOLUME PUNCTUATION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Volume with colon}{as vol(num):ppp} \optdef{s}{volp-sp}{Volume with colon and space}{as vol(num): ppp} \optdef{h}{volp-semi}{Volume with semi-colon}{as vol(num); ppp} \optdef{c}{volp-com}{Volume with comma}{as vol(num), ppp} \optdef{b}{volp-blk}{Volume with blank}{as vol(num) ppp} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Journal year like others}{as given by date position} \optdef{v}{jdt-v}{Journal vol(year)}{as 34(1995)} \optdef{s}{jdt-vs}{Journal vol (year)}{as 34 (1995)} \optdef{p}{jdt-p}{Year with pages}{as 34(2), (1995) 1345--1387} \optdef{c}{jdt-pc}{Year, comma, pages}{as 34(2), (1995), 1345--1387} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PAGE NUMBERS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Start and stop page numbers}{given} \optdef{f}{jpg-1}{Only start page number}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{LARGE PAGE NUMBERS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{No separators for large page numbers}{} \optdef{c}{pgsep-c}{Comma inserted over 9999}{as 11,234} \optdef{s}{pgsep-s}{Thin space inserted over 9999}{as 11 234} \optdef{p}{pgsep-p}{Period inserted over 9999}{as 11.234} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Article pages numbers only}{as 234-256} \optdef{p}{jwdpg}{Include `page' in articles}{as pp. 234--256} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % Some journals want page numbers at the end, even for books, proceedings, as % well as for journals. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF PAGES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Pages given mid text}{as is normal} \optdef{e}{pp-last}{Pages at end}{but before any notes} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Article volume as number only}{as 21} \optdef{p}{jwdvol}{Include `volume' in articles}{as vol. 21} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % Fiddle with the format and location of the number/series for collections and % inproceedings. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{num-xser}{Allows number without series}{and suppresses word "number"} \optdef{s}{}{Standard BibTeX}{as: "number 123 in Total Works"; error if number and no series} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{After chapter and pages}{as in standard BibTeX} \optdef{t}{numser}{Just before publisher}{or organization} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % Fiddle with the format and location of series and volume with books and collections. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Vol. 23 of Series}{as in standard BibTeX} \optdef{s}{ser-vol}{Series, vol. 23}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Series and volume after the editors}{} \optdef{e}{ser-ed}{Series and volume after booktitle}{and before editors} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % It is possible to decide whether the journal name should be % separated from the following specifications with a blank or comma. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Comma after journal}{name} \optdef{x}{jnm-x}{Space after journal}{name} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Books} % The title of a book (as opposed to an article in a book or journal) is % normally italicized. This may be set to the regular font. % % The page numbers in books may be set in parentheses, as (pp.\ 345--350). % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{BOOK TITLE:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Book title italic}{(\string\em)} \optdef{p}{btit-rm,bt-rm}{Book title plain}{(no font command)} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PAGES IN BOOKS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Pages in book plain}{as pp. 50-55} \optdef{p}{bkpg-par}{Pages in book in parentheses}{as (pp. 50-55)} \optdef{x}{bkpg-x}{Pages in book bare}{as 50-55} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Total book pages not printed}{} \optdef{p}{pg-bk}{For book: 345 pages}{or pp.} \optdef{a}{pg-bk,pg-pre}{Total book pages before publisher}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % Some psychology journals wish to have the publisher's address preceding % the name, separated by colon, as % \begin{quote}New York: Wiley and Sons\end{quote} % % Some journals (e.g.\ Nature) put publisher in parentheses with date, % as (Wiley and Sons, New York, 1983). These normally put the date in % parentheses at the end anyway, so this is a merging of the two sets of % parentheses. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER ADDRESS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Publisher, address}{as Harcourt, New York} \optdef{a}{add-pub}{Address: Publisher}{as New York: Harcourt} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Publisher as normal block}{without parentheses} \optdef{p}{pub-par}{Publisher in parentheses}{} \optdef{d}{pub-date}{Publisher and date in parentheses}{(Oxford, 1994)} \optdef{c}{pub-date,pub-xc}{Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma}{(Oxford 1994)} \optdef{f}{pub-date,pub-xpar}{Publisher and date without parentheses}{Oxford, 1994} \optdef{k}{pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc}{Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma}{Oxford 1994} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER POSITION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Publisher after chapter, pages}{} \optdef{p}{pre-pub}{Publisher before chapter, pages}{} \optdef{e}{pre-edn}{Publisher after edition}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{ISBN, ISSN, DOI numbers} % Books normally possess an ISBN number. This may be included as an % optional entry for \texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{booklet}, % \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{proceedings}, \texttt{inproceedings}. % However, it should be suppressed for \texttt{inbook} etc.\ when % there is a crossref to another book with the ISBN number. % % Periodicals contain an ISSN number. Add this to \texttt{article}, or % course, but also to \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings}, since % they are sometimes printed in a periodical. % % Journal articles that appear online are given a DOI number, something more % robust than a URL that can change as machines are upgraded. % The American Geophysical Union (AGU) uses the DOI as part of the % page number substitution for electronic journals, placing the number % where the pages would normally appear. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{ISBN NUMBER:}{} \optdef{*}{isbn}{Include ISBN}{for books, booklets, etc.} \optdef{x}{}{No ISBN}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{ISSN NUMBER:}{} \optdef{*}{issn}{Include ISSN}{for periodicals} \optdef{x}{}{No ISSN}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{DOI NUMBER:}{} \optdef{*}{doi}{Include DOI}{as "doi: number"} \optdef{a}{agu-doi,doi}{Insert DOI AGU style}{as part of page number} \optdef{x}{}{No DOI}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Editor of book without author} % % This is normally % \begin{quote} % J. K. James, editor % \end{quote} % but may also be % \begin{quote} % J. K. James, (editor)\\ % J. K. James (editor), % \end{quote} % Alternatively, the word \textsl{editor} may be capitalized and/or % abbreviated. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS):}{} \optdef{*}{}{Word `editor' after name}{} \optdef{a}{edpar}{`Name (editor),'}{in parentheses, after name, comma after} \optdef{b}{edpar,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor),'}{as above, editor upper case} \optdef{c}{edparc}{`Name, (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, comma between} \optdef{d}{edparc,bkedcap}{`Name, (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case} \optdef{e}{edparxc}{`Name (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, no commas} \optdef{f}{edparxc,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Edited by} % For an article within an edited collection, the normal form is % \begin{quote} % In J. K. James, editor, \emph{Title of Collection} \dots % \end{quote} % Alternative forms are % \begin{quote} % In J. K. James (editor), \emph{Title} \dots\\ % In \emph{Title}, edited by J. K. James \dots\\ % In \emph{Title} (Edited by J. K. James) \dots % \end{quote} % If none of the \texttt{edby} variations is used, then the same system is % used as for edited books, i.e. \texttt{edpar} applies. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Same as for edited book}{(names before booktitle)} \optdef{b}{edby}{In booktitle, edited by .. }{(where .. is names)} \optdef{p}{edby-par}{In booktitle (edited by ..)}{} \optdef{c}{edby-parc}{In booktitle, (edited by ..)}{} \optdef{e}{edby,edbyx}{In booktitle, editor ..}{} \optdef{f}{edby,edbyw}{In booktitle, (editor) ..}{} \optdef{k}{edby-par,edbyx}{In booktitle (editor..)}{} \optdef{g}{edby-parc,edbyx}{In booktitle, (editor..)}{} \optdef{j}{edby,edbyy}{In booktitle, .., editor}{} \optdef{m}{edby-par,edbyy}{In booktitle (.., editor)}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \mytempfalse \if\ans p\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans k\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi \beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY' (if editor capitalizable)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{`(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)'}{in lower case} \optdef{c}{edcap}{`(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)'}{in upper case} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Block punctuation} % Blocks are logical sections of the reference specification, such as the % author block, the journal block, editor block, etc. These are normally % separated by periods, but alternatively a comma may be used. Another % choice is to use commas except after titles where a period is given. % % \LaTeX\ offers an \texttt{openbib} option, which means that the blocks % are not only new sentences, but new lines as well. This can only % function when the default option here is taken, for then the command % |\newblock| is placed between the blocks. This command is normally % defined to do nothing, but \LaTeX\ redefines it to issue a new line % when open bibliographies are wanted. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS):}{} \optdef{*}{}{\string\newblock\space after blocks} {(periods or new lines with openbib option)} \optdef{c}{blk-com}{Comma between blocks}{} \optdef{s}{blk-com,com-semi}{Semi-colon between blocks}{} \optdef{b}{blk-com,com-blank}{Blanks between blocks}{} \optdef{t}{blk-tit}{Period after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas} \optdef{u}{blk-tit,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas} \optdef{a}{blk-tita}{Period after titles of articles}{else commas} \optdef{d}{blk-tita,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles}{else commas} \getans \endoptiongroup \mytempfalse \if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans t\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi \beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES (if not using \string\newblock)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Notes have regular punctuation}{like all other blocks} \optdef{p}{blknt}{Notes preceded by period}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Author block normal}{with regular block punctuation} \optdef{c}{au-col}{Author block with colon}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{\textsl{In} with colon} % When referring to works in a collection, one begins the block describing % that collection with \textsl{In}. Optionally, one may add a colon. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN':}{} \optdef{*}{}{Space after `in'}{for incollection or inproceedings} \optdef{c}{in-col}{Colon after `in'}{(as `In: ...')} \optdef{i}{in-it}{Italic `in'}{and space} \optdef{d}{in-col,in-it}{Italic `in' and colon}{} \optdef{x}{in-x}{No word `in'}{for edited works} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES (if using 'in' with collections)} {\if\ans x\else*\fi} \optdef{*}{}{No `in' before journal name}{} \optdef{i}{injnl}{Add `in' before journal name}{in style for incollection} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Final punctuation} % The punctuation at the end of the reference is normally a period. This % may be suppressed. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{FINAL PUNCTUATION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Period at very end}{of the listed reference} \optdef{x}{fin-bare}{No period at end}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Abbreviations} % A number of words may be abbreviated: pages, editors, volume, chapter, % and so on. The first two may be independently set to abbreviation, the % rest with a single option. % % Additionally, the edition numbers may be % output as words (first, second, etc.) or as numbers (1st, 2nd, etc.). % (Recall that the input in the \texttt{.bib} file is always as English % words.) % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' (if not using external language file)} {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)} \optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.} \optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{} \getans \beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{} \optdef{*}{}{`Editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)} \optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edition, chapter, etc} \optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' (if abbreviating words)} {\if\ans a*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{`Edition' abbreviated as `edn'}{} \optdef{a}{ednx}{`Edition' abbreviated as `ed'}{} \getans \beginoptiongroup{MONTHS WITH DOTS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Months with dots}{as Jan.} \optdef{x}{mth-bare}{Months without dots}{as Feb Mar} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{} \optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory} \optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as first, second, third, etc} \optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % The above choices about abbreviations are made only if the internal % languages are taken (English or \texttt{babel}). For an external language % definition file, these choices, along with possible other ones, are made % in the external file, which is read in at this point. % \begin{macrocode} \umes{Reading external language file \string\cfile=\cfile}% \if!\cfile!\relax\else \input\cfile \fi % \end{macrocode} % % This file contains the standard set of stored journal names present in % the basic bibliography style files. If other files containing journal % names are to be included, they may only contain the options \texttt{jabr} % or \texttt{jaa} since these options are selected here. No option % menus from the journal-name files will be read in. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{STORED JOURNAL NAMES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Full journal names}{for prestored journals} \optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviated journal names}{} \optdef{s}{jabr,jaa}{Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands}{like ApJ and AJ} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Variations on \textsl{and}} % It is possible to replace the word \textsl{and} with an ampersand \&, and to % specify whether a comma is to precede \textsl{and} in a list of more than two % names. % % A variable \textsl{and} may be provided for with the command |\BIBand| % in place of the word. In this case, the command must be defined in the % document file or some other package called. (This is intended for situations % where an ampersand is wanted in parenthetical citations, but the word in % textual ones.) % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{AMPERSAND:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Use word `and'}{in author lists} \optdef{a}{amper}{Use ampersand}{in place of `and'} \optdef{v}{varand}{Use \string\BIBand}{in place of `and'} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND':}{} \optdef{*}{}{Comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, and Harry'} \optdef{n}{and-xcom}{No comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick and Harry'} \optdef{c}{and-com}{Comma even with 2 authors}{as `Tom, and Harry'} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS (if using comma before `and' with authors)} {\if\ans c*\fi}% \optdef{*}{and-com-ed}{Comma with 2 editors}{in collections} \optdef{x}{}{Two editors without comma}{as `Tom and Harry'} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST:}{} \optdef{*}{}{With `and'}{before last author in reference list} \optdef{x}{xand}{No `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, Harry'} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `ET AL':}{} \optdef{*}{}{Comma before `et al'}{in reference list} \optdef{x}{etal-xc}{No comma before `et al'}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Font of \textsl{et al}} % One can chose that \textsl{et~al.}\ be put into italics. % Or, if the authors are in a different font from the regular one, the % \textsl{et~al.}\ can still be Roman. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{FONT OF `ET AL':}{} \optdef{*}{}{Plain et al}{} \optdef{i}{etal-it}{Italic et al}{} \optdef{r}{etal-rm}{Roman et al}{even when authors something else} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Additional Data Fields}\label{sec:revtex} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the revdata option group} % The American Physical Society's REV\TeX\ package contains \btx\ support % with a \texttt{bst} file generated from a variant of % \texttt{\filename}. The extra fields are also available here. % \begin{itemize} % \item \textbf{collaboration}: A collaboration name associated with a % reference. % \item \textbf{eprint}: The e-print citation for the reference (Los Alamos % or otherwise). E-print numbers can be turned into hyperlinks to the % online article. The output is\\ % \hspace*{2em}|\eprint{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}| % \item \textbf{archive}: is an optional argument for |\eprint|, as\\ % \hspace*{2em}|\eprint[|\textit{archive-des}|]{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|\\ % The \textit{archive-des} is some code such as \texttt{arXiv} that is % translated to a base URL by a class or package file. The default definition % of |\eprint| ignores \textit{archive-des} and prints \textit{eprint-spec} % as a URL. % \item \textbf{url}: A URL associated with the reference. Can be turned % into a hyperlink. % \end{itemize} % % A collaboration appears as part of the author list and the other two % appear at the end of the citaton. The URL field can be selected % independently of this option. % % In addition there are new fields for journals like Phys.\ Rev.~D that % no longer use page numbers. % \begin{itemize} % \item \textbf{eid}: Electronic article identifier. % \item \textbf{numpages}: Number of pages in an article. For use in % conjunction with the \textbf{eid} field when page counts are % desired. Deprecated when submitting to Phys.\ Rev. % % The \texttt{eprint} (with \texttt{archive}) and \texttt{url} fields may be % included independently of the other REV\TeX\ fields. % % The \texttt{eid} field is now always included, although it is optional for % the bibliography entries. This electronic identifier is a replacement for the % page number in electronic journals: it is the sequence number in the printed % volume. If present, it will be used in place of the page number. % % \end{itemize} % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{No additional fields}{for REVTeX} \optdef{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk}{Include REVTeX data fields} {collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, numpages, url} \getans \mytemptrue \if\ans r\mytempfalse\fi \beginoptiongroup{E-PRINT DATA FIELD: (without REVTeX fields)} {\ifmytemp*\fi} \optdef{*}{}{Do not include eprint field}{} \optdef{e}{eprint}{Include eprint and archive fields}{for electronic publications} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{URL address} % For electronic documents with an Internet address, add a URL entry. % Harvard already has this, but here it is done for all styles. % The URL text will be set with the \verb!\url! command in the \texttt{url} % package by Donald Arseneau. This package must be loaded for the command % to work right. It allows line breaks at punctuations. Otherwise, % \verb!\texttt! is used instead, with no line breaks. The URL text is preceded % by \verb!\urlprefix! which defaults to ``URL '' but may be redefined by the % user to be whatever s/he wants. The final space must be included. % % Note: selecting the REV\TeX\ fields automatically includes this, so the % offer only is made if REV\TeX\ has been rejected. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{URL ADDRESS: (without REVTeX fields)}{\ifmytemp*\fi} \optdef{*}{}{No URL}{for electronic (Internet) documents} \optdef{u}{url,url-blk}{Include URL}{as regular item block} \optdef{n}{url,url-nt}{URL as note}{} \optdef{l}{url,url-nl}{URL on new line}{after rest of reference} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Reference Component Tagging} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the bibinfo option group} % If reference component tagging is enabled, we % apply tags like |\bibinfo| and |\eprint| to the fields of data % in the content of the |\bibitem| statement. We also ensure that % these commands have a default meaning within the scope of the |thebibliography| % environment. The default definitions simply print the field and ignore the % tag. However, other programs or packages might make use of the tag % information to separate authors from title, for example. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{No reference component tags} {in the \string\bibitem\space entries} \optdef{b}{bibinfo}{Reference component tags} {like \string\bibinfo\space in the content of \string\bibitem} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Define emphasis} % In everything that been mentioned so far, italicization should be % understood to mean `emphasize' in the \LaTeX{} sense. This means that the % command |\em| is used. This is not the same as |\it|, which is always % italics. Rather, with |\em|, the font style switches between |\rm| and % |\it| depending on the context. Here one may choose to true italics, or % to switch off italics altogether. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{EMPHASIS: (affects all so-called italics)}{} \optdef{*}{}{Use emphasis}{ie, \string\em, allows font switching} \optdef{i}{em-it}{Use true italics}{ie, \string\it, absolute italics} \optdef{x}{em-x}{No italics}{at all} \optdef{u}{em-ul}{Underlining}{in place of italics, best with ulem package} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Plain \TeX\ compatibility} % Bold face, italics, and emphasis are made with the \LaTeXe\ commands, % which makes them incompatible with the obsolete \LaTeX2.09, and with % Plain \TeX. There are also some extra testing for existing commands % that best work with \LaTeXe\ syntax. % % If the bibliography style file is to be fully compatible with Plain \TeX, % do not select the option \texttt{nfss} but do take \texttt{plntx}. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX:}{} \optdef{*}{nfss}{Use LaTeX commands}{which may not work with Plain TeX} \optdef{t}{plntx}{Use only Plain TeX}{commands for fonts and testing} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % Terminate the options list. If a language definition file has been called, % then we have a closing brace too many, so add another dummy opening brace. % \begin{macrocode} \if!\cfile\jfile!\else \begingroup\MBswitch \wr(,{\pc) \endgroup \fi \endoptions %</options> % \end{macrocode} % \StopEventually{\PrintChanges} % % \section{The Bibliographic Coding} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!options&!driver&!bblbst> %<*!tail> % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later %------------------------------------------------------------------- %<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> % WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING % The input dbj file contains one of the options %<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> % nmft-it, nmft-bf, nmft-sc, or nmft-def %<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> % lab-it, lab-bf, lab-sc, or lab-def % without the corresponding general option(s): %<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> % nmft %<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> % lab % (You may be using an older dbj with a newer version of merlin.mbs) % Please edit your dbj file to add the general option(s) and reprocess. % %</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> %<*!exlang> %<!babel> % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH %<*babel> % This bibliography style file requires a file named babelbst.tex % containing the definitions of word commands like \bbleditor, etc. %</babel> %</!exlang> %<*exlang> % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in %<bahasa> % BAHASA %<brazilian> % BRAZILIAN %<catalan> % CATALAN %<croatian> % CROATIAN %<czech> % CZECH %<danish> % DANISH %<dansk> % DANSK %<dutch> % DUTCH %<english> % ENGLISH %<esperanto> % ESPERANTO %<finnish> % FINNISH %<french> % FRENCH %<galacian> % GALACIAN %<german> % GERMAN %<hungarian> % HUNGARIAN %<italian> % ITALIAN %<norwegian> % NORWEGIAN %<norsk> % NORWEGIAN %<polski> % POLISH %<polish> % POLISH %<portuguese> % PORTUGUESE %<romanian> % ROMANIAN %<russian> % RUSSIAN %<slovak> % SLOVAK %<slovenian> % SLOVENIAN %<slovene> % SLOVENIAN %<spanish> % SPANISH %<swedish> % SWEDISH %<turkish> % TURKISH %</exlang> %<*!html> %<*ay> % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly. % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly %<*alk> % or: apalike.sty by Oren Patashnik % The form of the \bibitem entries is % \bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{key}... %</alk> %<*!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)> % The form of the \bibitem entries is % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}... %<nat> % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}... % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening % parenthesis! %<nat> % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year. % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must % be parentheses in the label. % The \cite command functions as follows: % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990) %<nat> % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990) % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990) %<nat> % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990) % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2) % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990) % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32) % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al. %<nat> % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990 %</!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)> %<*har> % or: harvard.sty by Peter Williams and Thorsten Schnier %<harnm> % (needs natbib v5.3 or harvard v2.0.3) % The form of the bibitem entries is % \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Smith}{1990}{key}... %</har> %<*cay> % or: chicago.sty % The form of the bibitem entries is % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones, Baker, and Smith} % {Jones et al.}{1990}{key}... %</cay> %<*nmd> % or: named.sty % The form of the bibitem entries is % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}... %</nmd> %<*ast> % or: astron.sty % The form of the bibitem entries is % \bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}... %</ast> %<*cn> % or: authordate1-4.sty % The form of the bibitem entries is % \bibitem[\protect\citename{Jones et al.}1990]{key}... %</cn> %</ay> %<*!ay> %<*!alph&!cite> % This is a numerical citation style, and as such is standard LaTeX. %</!alph&!cite> %<*alph> % This is a labelled citation style similar to the standard alpha.bst, % where labels are of the form Dal90 or DBK89. %</alph> %<*cite&!alph> % This is a special pseudo-numerical bibliography style, intended to be % used to list all the entries in a bib database %</cite&!alph> % It requires no extra package to interface to the main text. % The form of the \bibitem entries is %<!alph&!cite> % \bibitem{key}... %<alph> % \bibitem[label]{key}... %<!alph&cite> % \bibitem[key]{key}... %<*!cite|alph> % Usage of \cite is as follows: %<*!alph&!cite> % \cite{key} ==>> [#] % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [#, chap. 2] % where # is a number determined by the ordering in the reference list. %</!alph&!cite> %<*alph> % \cite{key} ==>> [label] % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [label, chap. 2] % The order in the reference list is by label. %</alph> %<*seq-no&!alph> % The order in the reference list is that by which the works were originally % cited in the text, or that in the database. %</seq-no&!alph> %<*!seq-no&!alph> % The order in the reference list is alphabetical by authors. %</!seq-no&!alph> %</!cite|alph> %</!ay> %</!html> %<*html> % This bibliographic style file produces HTML output instead of LaTeX. % The LaTeX special characters are not translated, so that the output % (which has the .bbl ending still) will have to be further massaged, % and renamed with .html or .htm. The title and heading may also need % to be revised. % %<htlist&!htdes> % The output is a numbered list. %<htdes> % The output is an unnumbered list with the keys printed %<htdes> % before each entry. %<!htlist&!htdes> % The output is lists each entry as one paragraph. %</html> %--------------------------------------------------------------------- % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`ENTRY'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add URL entry type for \texttt{harnm} option} % The new \texttt{harvard.sty} of \LaTeXe{} includes an entry URL, or % rather it is included in the new \texttt{.bst} files for it. Add it % here too, but only for option \texttt{harnm}. % % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add optional entries \texttt{isbn}} % Books normally have an ISBN number. % This entry is (optionally) included, modelled after that in % \texttt{xbtxbst.doc}. % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the \texttt{revdata} data} % % \begin{macrocode} ENTRY { address %<annote> annote %<eprint> archive author booktitle chapter %<revdata> collaboration %<doi> doi edition editor eid %<eprint> eprint howpublished institution %<isbn> isbn %<issn> issn journal key %<lang> language month note number %<revdata> numpages organization pages publisher school series title type %<url|harnm|revdata> url volume year } {} %<!ay&!alph> { label } %<!ay&alph> { label extra.label sort.label } %<ay> { label extra.label sort.label short.list } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`init.state.consts'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {init.state.consts} { #0 'before.all := #1 'mid.sentence := #2 'after.sentence := #3 'after.block := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % |s| and |t| are general-purpose scratch registers whose value does not persist % past the end of a function. They also do not appear to be used to communicate % between functions or to be clobbered within a sub-function call. Hopefully. % \begin{macrocode} STRINGS { s t} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`output.nonnull'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {output.nonnull} { 's := output.state mid.sentence = %<!blk-com|(!com-semi&!com-blank)> { ", " * write$ } %<blk-com&com-semi> { "; " * write$ } %<blk-com&!com-semi&com-blank> { " " * write$ } { output.state after.block = { add.period$ write$ newline$ %<!html> "\newblock " write$ } { output.state before.all = 'write$ { add.period$ " " * write$ } if$ } if$ mid.sentence 'output.state := } if$ s } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`output'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {output} { duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ 'output.nonnull if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`output.check'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {output.check} { 't := duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } 'output.nonnull if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`fin.entry'} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add annotation} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: make ``babel compatible''} % I have often been asked to add an annotation function. This suggestion is % from Soren Dayton; it inputs a file with the same name as the cite key, or % uses the text in the \texttt{annote} field. It will only work with \LaTeXe. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {fin.entry} %<*!fin-bare> { add.period$ write$ %</!fin-bare> %<*fin-bare> { duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ 'write$ if$ %</fin-bare> %<html&htdes> "</dd>" write$ %<html&!htdes&htlist> "</li>" write$ %<html&!htdes&!htlist> "" write$ newline$ %<*annote> %<*!html> annote missing$ { "\bibAnnoteFile{" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$ } { "\bibAnnote{" cite$ * "}{" * annote * "}" * write$ newline$ } if$ %</!html> %<*html> "<blockquote>Key: " cite$ * write$ annote missing$ { newline$ } { " Annotation:" write$ newline$ annote write$ newline$ } if$ "</blockquote>" write$ newline$ %</html> %</annote> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.block'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {new.block} { output.state before.all = 'skip$ { after.block 'output.state := } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.sentence'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {new.sentence} { output.state after.block = 'skip$ { output.state before.all = 'skip$ { after.sentence 'output.state := } if$ } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`add.blank'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 10}{Add function} % When text is printed with \texttt{output} or % \texttt{output.check}, the \texttt{output.state} is set such that % a comma will precede the next output text. For special effects, we want to % suppress this comma, inserting a blank instead. Hence the % \texttt{output.state} is changed to \texttt{before.all}, meaning no % punctuation is to be inserted. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {add.blank} { " " * before.all 'output.state := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`add.colon'} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add macro} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Simplify: just tack on colon} % \begin{macrocode} %<*au-col|tit-col> FUNCTION {add.colon} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { ":" * add.blank } if$ } %</au-col|tit-col> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`no.blank.or.punct'} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add function} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 30}{Present only for option \texttt{yrpp-xsp}} % Another frill is to suppresss both blanks and punctuation. The |\hspace| % permits a line break at this point. % \begin{macrocode} %<*yrpp-xsp> FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct} %<*!html> { "\hspace{0pt}" * before.all 'output.state := } %</!html> %<html>{ before.all 'output.state := } %</yrpp-xsp> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`date.block'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 9}{Add function} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 25}{Add option \texttt{yrp-per}} % The \texttt{date.block} function is used for special punctuating effects % after the date. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {date.block} { %<*!yrp-x> %<yrp-col> ":" * %<*!yrp-col> %<yrp-semi> ";" * %<*!yrp-semi> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&!yrp-per> skip$ %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&yrp-per> new.sentence %</!yrp-semi> %</!yrp-col> %</!yrp-x> %<*yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi> %<!yrpp-xsp> add.blank %<yrpp-xsp> no.blank.or.punct %</yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`not'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {not} { { #0 } { #1 } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`and'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {and} { 'skip$ { pop$ #0 } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`or'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {or} { { pop$ #1 } 'skip$ if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`non.stop'} % \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 8}{Add to test if last character % is punctuation: . ! ?} % This function (my invention) tests if the last character in the string % on the stack is \texttt{. ! ?} by using \texttt{add.period\$}. It is to % be used for conditional italic correction or adding commas. % \begin{macrocode} %<*!tit-it&tit-qq> FUNCTION {non.stop} { duplicate$ "}" * add.period$ #-1 #1 substring$ "." = } %</!tit-it&tit-qq> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`remove.dots'} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 8}{Add macro} % This macro removes any periods from the string on the stack. To be used % for undotting journal names, months, and juniors. Previously % \texttt{purify\$} was used for this, but that removes more than just % dots. % \begin{macrocode} %<*nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper> STRINGS {z} FUNCTION {remove.dots} { 'z := "" { z empty$ not } { z #1 #1 substring$ z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z := duplicate$ "." = 'pop$ { * } if$ } while$ } %</nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.block.checka'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> FUNCTION {new.block.checka} { empty$ 'skip$ 'new.block if$ } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.block.checkb'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} { empty$ swap$ empty$ and 'skip$ 'new.block if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checka'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} { empty$ 'skip$ 'new.sentence if$ } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checkb'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} { empty$ swap$ empty$ and 'skip$ 'new.sentence if$ } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`field.or.null'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {field.or.null} { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } 'skip$ if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`emphasize'} % Emphasis can be either italic or the alternating font. The font command % may be NFSS or regular \LaTeX~2.09 declarations. %\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Add \texttt{nfss} option} %\changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Add \texttt{em-ul} option} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {emphasize} %<*!em-x> { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<html> { "" swap$ * "" * } %<*!html> %<em-ul> { "\uline{" swap$ * "}" * } %<*!em-ul> %<*!nfss> %<!em-it> { "{\em " swap$ * "\/}" * } %<em-it> { "{\it " swap$ * "\/}" * } %</!nfss> %<*nfss> %<!em-it> { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * } %<em-it> { "\textit{" swap$ * "}" * } %</nfss> %</!em-ul> %</!html> if$ } %</!em-x> %<em-x>{ skip$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`bolden'} % The bold font command may be NFSS or the regular \LaTeX~2.09 declaration. %\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Add \texttt{nfss} option} % \begin{macrocode} %<*nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf> FUNCTION {bolden} { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<html> { "" swap$ * "" * } %<*!html> %<!nfss> { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } %<nfss> { "\textbf{" swap$ * "}" * } %</!html> if$ } %</nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`scaps'} % To put text into small caps. %\changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Add function} % \begin{macrocode} %<*lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc> FUNCTION {scaps} { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<html> { skip$ } %<*!html> %<!nfss> { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * } %<nfss> { "\textsc{" swap$ * "}" * } %</!html> if$ } %</lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`roman.list'} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add function} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Remove function} % \begin{macro}{`roman.cite'} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 16}{Add function} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Remove function} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`bib.name.font'} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro} % \begin{macro}{`bib.fname.font'} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro} % \begin{macro}{`cite.name.font'} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro} % Define functions for formatting the author/editor names, one for the % surnames (\texttt{bib.name.font}) and one for the first names % (\texttt{bib.fname.font}). These could be identical, or the latter is % deactivated if first names are not to be formatted, only the last names. % % For citations, we have \texttt{cite.name.font}. Here only surnames appear. % % It is also possible to have a user-defined font command for each, which the % user must define in his work. These are |\bibnamefont{}| and |\bibfnamefont{}|, % and some defaults are provided that simply repeat the arguments. Two commands % are needed if \texttt{nmft-def} and \texttt{fnm-def} are both given. % % If neither \texttt{fnm-def} nor \texttt{fnm-rm} are given, then the first names % are formatted the same as the surnames. % \begin{macrocode} %<*nmft> FUNCTION {bib.name.font} %<nmft-it>{ emphasize } %<!nmft-it&nmft-bf>{ bolden } %<!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&nmft-sc>{ scaps } %<*!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def> { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<!html> { "\bibnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * } %<html> { skip$ } if$ } %</!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def> FUNCTION {bib.fname.font} %<!fnm-rm&!fnm-def>{ bib.name.font } %<fnm-rm>{ skip$ } %<*!fnm-rm&fnm-def> { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<!html> { "\bibfnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * } %<html> { skip$ } if$ } %</!fnm-rm&fnm-def> %</nmft> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*lab> FUNCTION {cite.name.font} %<lab-it>{ emphasize } %<!lab-it&lab-bf>{ bolden } %<!lab-it&!lab-bf&lab-sc>{ scaps } %<*!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def> { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<!html> { "\citenamefont{" swap$ * "}" * } %<html> { skip$ } if$ } %</!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def> %</lab> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`tie.or.space.prefix'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: replace \texttt{tie.or.space.connect} with % more flexible function} % The function \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} determines whether % the top item on the stack requires a tie character and % slips that (or a space character if not) ahead of it. % At this point a font switch or other function can be applied to % the top item on the stack, and the appropriate space found % just ahead of it on the stack. % % The sequence \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} \texttt{*} \texttt{*} is a common idiom % for joining the top two stack objects with a tie or space % depending on the length of the top object. % % Another idiom is to apply \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix}, apply a font switch, % and then swap and join. In this case the tie or space follows the object. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix} { duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < { "~" } { " " } if$ swap$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`capitalize'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 7}{Add capitalizing function} % Capitalizing is easy for regular languages, but for \texttt{babel}, % some trickery stuff is needed; definitions of |\capitalize| and % |\Capitalize| are written to the \texttt{.bbl} file. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {capitalize} %<!babel>{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ } %<babel>{ "\capitalize" swap$ * } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`space.word'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to space out words; necessary % for the multilingual functions.} % The function \texttt{space.word} adds a space before and after the word or % words currently on the stack. This was added for the \texttt{bbl.}$nnn$ % functions, that contain only a word without spacing, but replace explicit % text in the originals that were spaced out. Its seems more flexible to % define the word functions to be without spacing. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {space.word} { " " swap$ * " " * } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words. % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word. % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!exlang> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`bbl.xxx'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Replace all explicit words with functions % of the form \texttt{bbl.xxx}.} % \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 15}{Add option \texttt{varand}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{ednx}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Jun 9}{Make \texttt{\char`\\BIBand} protected} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add \texttt{bbl.eidpp}} % These are the default English words. There is no default language % option: one of \texttt{english} or \texttt{babel} must be given. % \begin{macrocode} %<*!babel> % The language selected here is ENGLISH FUNCTION {bbl.and} %<!varand|html>{ "and"} %<varand&!html>{ "\protect\BIBand{}"} FUNCTION {bbl.etal} { "et~al." } FUNCTION {bbl.editors} %<!ed>{ "editors" } %<ed>{ "eds." } FUNCTION {bbl.editor} %<!ed>{ "editor" } %<ed>{ "ed." } FUNCTION {bbl.edby} { "edited by" } FUNCTION {bbl.edition} %<!abr>{ "edition" } %<abr&!ednx>{ "edn." } %<abr&ednx>{ "ed." } FUNCTION {bbl.volume} %<!abr>{ "volume" } %<abr>{ "vol." } FUNCTION {bbl.of} { "of" } FUNCTION {bbl.number} %<!abr>{ "number" } %<abr>{ "no." } FUNCTION {bbl.nr} { "no." } FUNCTION {bbl.in} { "in" } FUNCTION {bbl.pages} %<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" } %<pp>{ "pp." } %<!pp&ppx>{ "" } FUNCTION {bbl.page} %<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" } %<pp>{ "p." } %<!pp&ppx>{ "" } %<*revdata> FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp} { "pages" } %</revdata> FUNCTION {bbl.chapter} %<!abr>{ "chapter" } %<abr>{ "chap." } FUNCTION {bbl.techrep} %<!abr>{ "Technical Report" } %<abr>{ "Tech. Rep." } FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis} { "Master's thesis" } FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis} { "Ph.D. thesis" } %<*!xedn> FUNCTION {bbl.first} %<!ord>{ "First" } %<ord>{ "1st" } FUNCTION {bbl.second} %<!ord>{ "Second" } %<ord>{ "2nd" } FUNCTION {bbl.third} %<!ord>{ "Third" } %<ord>{ "3rd" } FUNCTION {bbl.fourth} %<!ord>{ "Fourth" } %<ord>{ "4th" } FUNCTION {bbl.fifth} %<!ord>{ "Fifth" } %<ord>{ "5th" } FUNCTION {bbl.st} { "st" } FUNCTION {bbl.nd} { "nd" } FUNCTION {bbl.rd} { "rd" } FUNCTION {bbl.th} { "th" } %</!xedn> %<*!abr> MACRO {jan} {"January"} MACRO {feb} {"February"} MACRO {mar} {"March"} MACRO {apr} {"April"} MACRO {may} {"May"} MACRO {jun} {"June"} MACRO {jul} {"July"} MACRO {aug} {"August"} MACRO {sep} {"September"} MACRO {oct} {"October"} MACRO {nov} {"November"} MACRO {dec} {"December"} %</!abr> %<*abr> MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} MACRO {may} {"May"} MACRO {jun} {"Jun."} MACRO {jul} {"Jul."} MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} MACRO {sep} {"Sep."} MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} %</abr> %</!babel> % \end{macrocode} % % Here are the definitions for \texttt{babel} option, i.e., explicit % translations are not used, but rather only \LaTeX{} macros that must be % defined in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}. This could allow automatic % language selection. % \begin{macrocode} %<*babel> % The BABEL language selection is made here; definitions in babelbst.tex. FUNCTION {bbl.and} { "\bbland{}"} FUNCTION {bbl.etal} { "\bbletal{}"} FUNCTION {bbl.editors} %<!ed>{ "\bbleditors{}" } %<ed>{ "\bbleds{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.editor} %<!ed>{ "\bbleditor{}" } %<ed>{ "\bbled{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.edby} { "\bbledby{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.edition} %<!abr>{ "\bbledition{}" } %<abr>{ "\bbledn{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.volume} %<!abr>{ "\bblvolume{}" } %<abr>{ "\bblvol{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.of} { "\bblof{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.number} %<!abr>{ "\bblnumber{}" } %<abr>{ "\bblno{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.nr} { "\bblno{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.in} { "\bblin{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.pages} %<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpages{}" } %<pp>{ "\bblpp{}" } %<!pp&ppx>{ "" } FUNCTION {bbl.page} %<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpage{}" } %<pp>{ "\bblp{}" } %<!pp&ppx>{ "" } FUNCTION {bbl.chapter} %<!abr>{ "\bblchapter{}" } %<abr>{ "\bblchap{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.techrep} %<!abr>{ "\bbltechreport{}" } %<abr>{ "\bbltechrep{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis} { "\bblmthesis{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis} { "\bblphdthesis{}" } %<*revdata> FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp} { "\bbleidpp{}" } %</revdata> %<*!xedn> FUNCTION {bbl.first} %<!ord>{ "\bblfirst{}" } %<ord>{ "\bblfirsto{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.second} %<!ord>{ "\bblsecond{}" } %<ord>{ "\bblsecondo{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.third} %<!ord>{ "\bblthird{}" } %<ord>{ "\bblthirdo{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.fourth} %<!ord>{ "\bblfourth{}" } %<ord>{ "\bblfourtho{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.fifth} %<!ord>{ "\bblfifth{}" } %<ord>{ "\bblfiftho{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.st} { "\bblst{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.nd} { "\bblnd{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.rd} { "\bblrd{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.th} { "\bblth{}" } %</!xedn> MACRO {jan} {"\bbljan{}"} MACRO {feb} {"\bblfeb{}"} MACRO {mar} {"\bblmar{}"} MACRO {apr} {"\bblapr{}"} MACRO {may} {"\bblmay{}"} MACRO {jun} {"\bbljun{}"} MACRO {jul} {"\bbljul{}"} MACRO {aug} {"\bblaug{}"} MACRO {sep} {"\bblsep{}"} MACRO {oct} {"\bbloct{}"} MACRO {nov} {"\bblnov{}"} MACRO {dec} {"\bbldec{}"} %</babel> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`eng.ord'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to format English ordinals.} % This function adds English endings for ordinals 1, 2, 3. However, if % the second last digit is 1, then the ending is `th' for all last digits. % So far, all other languages included do not have this problem, and it is % sufficient to add the \textsl{th} equivalent. This might change with further % languages. % % This function must be included with \texttt{babel} too, since that includes % English. This means that the language definition files must also provide % for |\bblst|, |\bblnd|, and |\bblrd|, setting them all equal to |\bblth|. % % \begin{macrocode} %<*(english|!exlang)&!xedn> FUNCTION {eng.ord} { duplicate$ "1" swap$ * #-2 #1 substring$ "1" = { bbl.th * } { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ duplicate$ "1" = { pop$ bbl.st * } { duplicate$ "2" = { pop$ bbl.nd * } { "3" = { bbl.rd * } { bbl.th * } if$ } if$ } if$ } if$ } %</(english|!exlang)&!xedn> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!exlang> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!tail> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!head> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!jabr> MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} MACRO {ieeetcad} {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} %</!jabr> % \end{macrocode} % % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 8}{Revise journal abbreviations} % Journal abbreviations have been revised from the original Patashnik % ones with help of Conrado Badenas and the IUA recommendations. % \begin{macrocode} %<*jabr> MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."} MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} MACRO {ieeetcad} {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."} MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."} MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."} MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"} MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."} MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."} %</jabr> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.check'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: % add functions \texttt{bibinfo.check}, \texttt{bibinfo.warn}, % and \texttt{format.eprint}} % Define functions that encapsulate the argument % in a \TeX\ macro that allows for further processing when the % bibliography is processed, or allows for a separate computer % program to parse the |\bibitem| contents. % % The following table summarizes how each of the \btx{} entries % is accessed for output; these are the points where % the \texttt{format.bibinfo} or \texttt{bibinfo.check} functions % are called. % \subsubsection*{Trapped via \texttt{format.bibinfo}} % \begin{description} % \item[ \texttt{author} ]\texttt{format.names} % \item[ \texttt{collaboration} ]\texttt{format.authors} % \item[ \texttt{doi} ]\texttt{format.doi} % \item[ \texttt{editor} ]\texttt{format.editors} (\texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{format.names.ed} (\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}) % \item[ \texttt{eid} ]\texttt{format.journal.eid} (\texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, article) checks the output from \texttt{format.journal.pages} % \item[ \texttt{isbn} ]\texttt{format.isbn} % \item[ \texttt{issn} ]\texttt{format.issn} % \item[ \texttt{journal} ]\texttt{format.article.crossref}, article % \item[ \texttt{numpages} ]\texttt{format.journal.eid} % \item[ \texttt{organization} ]\texttt{format.organization.address} (\texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{manual} % \item[ \texttt{pages} ]\texttt{format.book}.pages (\texttt{book}, \texttt{booklet}), \texttt{format.pages} (\texttt{format.journal.pages}, \texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{article}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings}) % \item[ \texttt{publisher} ]\texttt{format.publisher.address} (like \texttt{output.check}, \texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings}) % \item[ \texttt{title} ]\texttt{format.title}, \texttt{format.btitle}, \texttt{misc}, \texttt{presort}, \texttt{bib.sort.order} % \item[ \texttt{volume} ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.book.crossref} % \item[ \texttt{year} ]in optional argument of \texttt{\char`\\bibitem}, \texttt{format.date} (as part of date), \texttt{format.year}, \texttt{format.org.or.pub} % \item[ \texttt{booktitle} ]\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle} (\texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings}), \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref} % \item[ \texttt{howpublished} ]\texttt{booklet}, \texttt{misc} % \item[ \texttt{edition} ]\texttt{convert.edition.format.edition} % \item[ \texttt{institution} ]\texttt{techreport} % \item[ \texttt{school} ]\texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis} % \item[ \texttt{address} ]\texttt{format.org.or.pub}, \texttt{booklet}, \texttt{manual}, \texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}, \texttt{techreport} % \item[ \texttt{chapter} ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages} % \item[ \texttt{number} ]\texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.tr.number} % \item[ \texttt{series} ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.book.crossref} % \item[ \texttt{type} ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{format.thesis.type}, \texttt{format.tr.number} % \item[ \texttt{month} ]\texttt{format.date} % \item[ \texttt{note} ]\texttt{format.note} % \item[ \texttt{annote} ]\texttt{fin.entry} % \end{description} % % \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\url}} % \begin{description} % \item[ \texttt{url} ]\texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\harvardurl}, \texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.note} (\texttt{\char`\\url}) % \end{description} % % \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\eprint}} % \begin{description} % \item[ \texttt{eprint} ]\texttt{format.eprint} % \item[ \texttt{archive} ]\texttt{format.eprint} % \end{description} % % \subsubsection*{Not encapsulated:} % \begin{description} % \item[ \texttt{key} ]cite key % \item[ \texttt{language} ]operand of \texttt{\char`\\selectlanguage} % \end{description} % % \subsubsection*{\texttt{bibinfo} tag, but not a \btx{} field} % \begin{description} % \item[ \texttt{date} ]\texttt{format.date} % \end{description} % % Provides robust access to fields, checking against \texttt{missing\$} % and \texttt{empty\$}. A \dtx{} option allows giving % a warning if either is the case. % % If not, it encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\bibinfo|. % The encapsulation is enabled by the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option: % if turned off, it simply pops the unneeded object. % % \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field} % % \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty} % Side effect: warning. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {bibinfo.check} { swap$ duplicate$ missing$ { %<bibinfo.warning> swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$ %<!bibinfo.warning> pop$ pop$ "" } { duplicate$ empty$ { %<bibinfo.warning> swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ %<!bibinfo.warning> swap$ pop$ } { swap$ %<bibinfo> "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" * %<!bibinfo> pop$ } if$ } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.warn'} % Replaces \texttt{output.check} % with \texttt{bibinfo.warn} followed by \texttt{output}. % % \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field} % % \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty} % % Side effect: warning if the field is empty. % Note: if the \dtx{} option \texttt{bibinfo} is not in effect, % then no encapsulation is done. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn} { swap$ duplicate$ missing$ { swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$ "" } { duplicate$ empty$ { swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } { swap$ %<bibinfo> "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" * %<!bibinfo> pop$ } if$ } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.eprint'} % \changes{4.00}{2000 Jan 21}{Add optional archive field} % The access function for the \texttt{eprint} field. % % If the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option is selected, then this function % encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\eprint|. % % \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-URL} % \begin{macrocode} %<*eprint> FUNCTION {format.eprint} { eprint duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "\eprint" archive empty$ 'skip$ { "[" * archive * "]" * } if$ "{" * swap$ * "}" * } if$ } %</eprint> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`write.url'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{write.url} for option % \texttt{harnm}} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Apply to non-Harvard styles} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Fix bug when both harnm and url-nl given} % This function taken over from \texttt{agsm.sty}, the main \texttt{harvard} % bib style. For non-Harvard styles that want to add the URL on a new line % after the reference, use this function too, but defined slightly % differently. % \begin{macrocode} %<*(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> FUNCTION {write.url} %<*!html> { url empty$ { skip$ } %<harnm> { "\newline\harvardurl{" url * "}" * write$ newline$ } %<!harnm&url-nl> { "\newline\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * write$ newline$ } if$ } %</!html> %<*html> { url empty$ { skip$ } { " <a href=" quote$ * url * quote$ * ">" * url * "</a>" * write$ newline$ } if$ } %</html> %</(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.url'} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 22}{Add function for regular URLs} % A non-harvard version of URL is also made for regular styles. % This is used only if the URL text is added as a regular item to the % reference information, blocked if necessary. Alternatives are on a new line % (Harvard-like) or in the note. % \begin{macrocode} %<*(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata> FUNCTION {format.url} { url empty$ { "" } %<!html> { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * } %<html> { "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$ %<html> * ">" * url * "</a>" * } if$ } %</(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`check.speaker'} % \changes{4.15}{2006 Jan 4}{Add \texttt{presentation}, which needs this function % to highlight speaker name} % The \texttt{presentation} type uses the \texttt{key} entry to indicate which % author is the speaker, as the sequence number in the author list. The speaker's % name is put into a different font, depending on the extra option. If no font % is specified, all names are the same. % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } %<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> FUNCTION {check.speaker} { key empty$ 'skip$ { key nameptr int.to.str$ = { %<pres-bf> bolden %<pres-it&!pres-bf> emphasize %<pres-sc&!pres-it&!pres-bf> scaps } 'skip$ if$ } if$ } %</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \begin{macro}{`format.names'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{harvard} command for `and' with % new option \texttt{harnm}} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Add option \texttt{nm-revf}} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvx}} % \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 7}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvv}} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Jr to go at end with \texttt{nm-rev1} (AGU style)} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Add option \texttt{nmand-rm}} % \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 30}{Add option \texttt{etal-rm}} % \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Add option \texttt{aunm-semi}} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Add option \texttt{nm-revv1} (AGU style with full % names)} % \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font; allow first names different} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{aunm-sl}} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others'' % from last format function} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate author name for later processing; % trap empty author list; % bring common braces to outer level for easier understanding of code.} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 7}{Add option \texttt{jnrlst} to put Jr. last} % \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvcx}} % \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvvc}} % \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{Add option \texttt{etal-xc}} % The \texttt{harvard} package now (version 2.0.3, for \LaTeXe) uses % |\harvardand| in place of the word \textsl{and} so that it can be changed % at run time. This is allowed for with the option \texttt{harnm}, which % need not be used only with the \texttt{har} option. % This seems like a useless feature for \texttt{.bst} files made from % this multilanguage source. However, it is included anyway, which means % if \texttt{harnm} option selected, one must redefine |\harvardand| % in the document for the language being used. % % The location of the junior part for reversed name is not obvious. Prior % to version 4.0, I always had it attached to the last name, as % Smith, Jr, John, put it probably is better as Smith, John, Jr. For the % AGU \texttt{nm-rev1} I always did it this way, probably because I had a % good AGU example to follow. Dilemma: do I just change them all or add an % option to do it? The option will maintain consistency with older % versions, but this could also be considered a bug fix rather than a new % feature. Solution: use the option, since I have found other \texttt{.bst} % files from Beebe and Harvard that put junior between surname and first % name. % % |bibinfo| is a variable used to store a string telling it whether the % names being formatted are authors or editors, since this function is called % for both purposes. Every call to this function must push the string onto the stack % just before the call. % \begin{macrocode} STRINGS { bibinfo} % \end{macrocode} % % Stack note: if the names argument is a non-nil list, this function returns % one object on the stack, the formatted list of names. % % \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.names} { 'bibinfo := duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { 's := "" 't := #1 'nameptr := s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames 'namesleft := { namesleft #0 > } { s nameptr % \end{macrocode} % Here is the author formatting when the names are not set in any special % font, or when the entire name set in a single special font. % \begin{macrocode} %<*!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> %<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> %<nm-init> "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" %<*!nm-init> %<nm-rev&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" %<nm-rev&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}" %<*!nm-rev> %<nm-rv&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{~}}" %<nm-rv&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{~}}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rv> %<nm-rvx&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{}}" %<nm-rvx&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{}}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rvx> %<nm-rvcx&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{}}" %<nm-rvcx&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f{}}{, jj}" %<*!nm-rvcx> %<nm-rvv&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{.}.}" %<nm-rvv&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{.}.}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rvv> %<nm-rvvc&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{.}.}" %<nm-rvvc&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f{.}.}{, jj}" %<*!nm-rvvc> %<nm-revf&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" %<nm-revf&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}" %<*!nm-revf> "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" %</!nm-revf> %</!nm-rvvc> %</!nm-rvv> %</!nm-rvcx> %</!nm-rvx> %</!nm-rv> %</!nm-rev> %</!nm-init> %</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> %<*nm-rev1> duplicate$ #1 > { "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" } %<!jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" } %<jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}" } if$ %</nm-rev1> %<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> duplicate$ #1 > { "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" } %<!jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" } %<jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}" } if$ %</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> format.name$ %<nm-rv|nm-rvx> remove.dots %<nmft&nmand-rm> bib.name.font %</!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> % \end{macrocode} % Here is the author formatting when the first and last names are % set in (possibly different) special fonts. % % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 7}{Junior part always in first name font} % The junior part is optionally between the reversed names, or after them. % \begin{macrocode} %<*nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> %<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> %<*nm-init> "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-init> %<*!nm-init> %<*nm-rev> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f.}" %<jnrlst> "{f.}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rev> %<*!nm-rev> %<*nm-rv> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{~}}" %<jnrlst> "{f{~}}{ jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rv> %<*!nm-rv> %<*nm-rvx> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{}}" %<jnrlst> "{f{}}{ jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvx> %<*!nm-rvx> %<*nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f{}}" %<jnrlst> "{f{}}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { remove.dots bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvcx> %<*!nm-rvcx> %<*nm-rvv> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{.}.}" %<jnrlst> "{f{.}.}{ jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvv> %<*!nm-rvv> %<*nm-rvvc> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f{.}.}" %<jnrlst> "{f{.}.}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvvc> %<*!nm-rvvc> %<*nm-revf> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{ff}" %<jnrlst> "{ff}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-revf> %<*!nm-revf> "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</!nm-revf> %</!nm-rvvc> %</!nm-rvv> %</!nm-rvcx> %</!nm-rvx> %</!nm-rv> %</!nm-rev> %</!nm-init> %</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> %<*nm-rev1> nameptr #1 > { "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ } { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f.}" %<jnrlst> "{f.}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ } if$ %</nm-rev1> %<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> nameptr #1 > { "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ } { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{ff}" %<jnrlst> "{ff}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ } if$ %</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> * %</nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bibinfo bibinfo.check %<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> type$ "presentation" = { check.speaker } 'skip$ if$ %</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> 't := nameptr #1 > { %<*nmlm> %<m1> nameptr #1 %<m2> nameptr #2 %<m3> nameptr #3 %<m4> nameptr #4 %<m5> nameptr #5 %<m6> nameptr #6 %<m7> nameptr #7 %<m8> nameptr #8 %<m9> nameptr #9 %<m0> nameptr #0 %<m10> #10 + %<m20> #20 + %<m30> #30 + %<m40> #40 + %<m50> #50 + %<m60> #60 + %<m70> #70 + %<m80> #80 + %<m90> #90 + #1 + = %<x1> numnames #1 %<x2> numnames #2 %<x3> numnames #3 %<x4> numnames #4 %<x5> numnames #5 %<x6> numnames #6 %<x7> numnames #7 %<x8> numnames #8 %<x9> numnames #9 %<x0> numnames #0 %<x10> #10 + %<x20> #20 + %<x30> #30 + %<x40> #40 + %<x50> #50 + %<x60> #60 + %<x70> #70 + %<x80> #80 + %<x90> #90 + > and { "others" 't := #1 'namesleft := } 'skip$ if$ %</nmlm> namesleft #1 > %<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { ", " * t * } %<aunm-semi> { "; " * t * } %<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/ " * t * } { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = { 't := } { pop$ } if$ %<(and-com|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> "," * %<(and-com|xand)&aunm-semi> ";" * %<(and-com|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> "/" * %<*!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand> numnames #2 > %<etal-xc> t "others" = not and %<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { "," * } %<aunm-semi> { ";" * } %<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/" * } 'skip$ if$ %</!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand> t "others" = { %<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font * %<!(nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font } %<*!xand> { %<*!harnm> %<!amper> bbl.and %<amper> "\&" %</!harnm> %<harnm> "\harvardand{}" %<nmft&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bib.name.font space.word * t * } %</!xand> %<xand> { " " * t * } if$ } if$ } 't if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ %<*nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> t "others" = 'skip$ { bib.name.font } if$ %</nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.names.ed'} % \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Add option \texttt{ed-rev} to allow editor % to be formatted just like authors'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Option \texttt{nm-revf} to act just as default} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{and-com-ed} to replace % \texttt{and-com} for collection editors} % \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font; allow first names different} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{ed-au}, synonomous with % \texttt{ed-rev}} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Mar 18}{Bug fix: \texttt{and-com-ed} used correctly} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate editor for later processing; % trap empty editor list} % When editors are used in place of authors to identify the work, the % names are always formatted just like authors'. However, in collections, % where ``edited by'' or ``\emph{names} (editors)'' are given, it is % normal not to reverse the names, even if the authors' are. The option % \texttt{ed-rev} sees to it that editor names are always formatted exactly % like those of authors, being reversed if necessary. % % The option \texttt{ed-au} is identical to \texttt{ed-rev}, but is more % logical. It means editors (in incollections) are formatted exactly like % authors, with all the font, reversing, and number limitations. This is % selected automatically with \texttt{nm-init} and \texttt{nm-} default to save % programming memory. % % The option \texttt{nm-revf} in this case acts the same as the default % when no \texttt{nm-} option given: full names with surname last. Therefore % it is not necessary to test for it at all, since it, like the default, % has the lowest priority: any other \texttt{nm-} option clobbers it. % % The options \texttt{aunm-semi} and \texttt{aunm-sl} will put a semi-colon or % slash between editor names, just as for authors, when \texttt{ed-rev} not % selected, in keeping with the idea that in this case both authors and editors % are to be formatted the same. % % This function either dispatches to \texttt{format.names} or executes code % which is similar. In the latter case, names are always presented first % followed by surname (``last name''); name limit processing (\texttt{nmlm}) is not executed; % and endgame processing differs in being qualified by \texttt{nmfted}. % % Stack note: if the names (second) argument is a non-nil list, this function returns % with one object on the stack, the formatted list of names. % % \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.names.ed} { %<ed-rev|ed-au> format.names %<*!ed-rev&!ed-au> 'bibinfo := duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { 's := "" 't := #1 'nameptr := s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames 'namesleft := { namesleft #0 > } { s nameptr % \end{macrocode} % Editor name is handled as a single object, with no separation of first and last name. % \begin{macrocode} %<*!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> %<nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" %<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> %<nm-revv1> "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" %<*!nm-revv1> %<nm-rv> "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rv> %<nm-rvx> "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rvx> %<nm-rvcx> "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rvcx> %<nm-rvv|nm-rvvc> "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc> "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" %</!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc> %</!nm-rvcx> %</!nm-rvx> %</!nm-rv> %</!nm-revv1> %</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> format.name$ %<nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> remove.dots %<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font %</!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> % \end{macrocode} % Editor first and last name handled separately. % \begin{macrocode} %<*(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> %<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> %<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> %<*nm-revv1> "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-revv1> %<*!nm-revv1> %<*nm-rv> "{f{~}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rv> %<*!nm-rv> %<*nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{f{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> %<*!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> %<*nm-rvv> "{f{.}.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvv> %<*!nm-rvv> "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</!nm-rvv> %</!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> %</!nm-rv> %</!nm-revv1> %</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> * %</(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> bibinfo bibinfo.check 't := nameptr #1 > { namesleft #1 > %<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { ", " * t * } %<aunm-semi> { "; " * t * } %<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/ " * t * } { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = { 't := } { pop$ } if$ %<(and-com-ed|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> "," * %<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-semi> ";" * %<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> "/" * %<*!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand> numnames #2 > %<etal-xc> t "others" = not and %<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { "," * } %<aunm-semi> { ";" * } %<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/" * } 'skip$ if$ %</!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand> t "others" = { %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font * %<!(nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font } %<*!xand> { %<*!harnm> %<!amper> bbl.and %<amper> "\&" %</!harnm> %<harnm> "\harvardand{}" %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bib.name.font space.word * t * } %</!xand> %<xand> { " " * t * } if$ } if$ } 't if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ %<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> t "others" = 'skip$ { bib.name.font } if$ %</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> } if$ %</!ed-rev&!ed-au> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.key'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> FUNCTION {format.key} { empty$ { key field.or.null } { "" } if$ } %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.authors'} % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: Add code to emit collaboration.} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.authors} { author "author" format.names %<*revdata> duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { " (" swap$ * ")" * } if$ * } if$ %</revdata> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`get.bbl.editor'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: access function for editor text entity} % Use this function universally when accessing the ``editor'' text entity. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor} { editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.editors'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{edpar}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add option \texttt{edparc}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate editors for further processing.} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 6}{Add option \texttt{edparxc}} % The option \texttt{edpar} puts the word `editor' in parentheses. % In \texttt{genbst.mbs}, this occurred automatically with the option % \texttt{ed}, to abbreviate `editor' to `ed'. In \texttt{babel.mbs}, % this was not the case, because of complications with the word functions. % Now this possibility is added as a special option, which means there is % some inconsistency with older \texttt{.dbj} files that called \texttt{ed}: % the abbreviated `ed' is not put in parentheses unless \texttt{edpar} is % also called. % % Note that the code here is very similar to code in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}; % the two should be kept coordinated. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.editors} { editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!edpar&!edparxc> "," * " " * get.bbl.editor %<bkedcap> capitalize %<edpar|edparc|edparxc> "(" swap$ * ")" * * } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.in.editors'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{edpar}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add option \texttt{edparc}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: code subsumed into % \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}} % See the note about the option \texttt{edpar} above. % % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.book.pages'} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add function} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.} % \begin{macrocode} %<*pg-bk> FUNCTION {format.book.pages} { pages "pages" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { " " * bbl.pages * } if$ } %</pg-bk> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.isbn'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add function} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate isbn for further processing} % \begin{macrocode} %<*isbn> FUNCTION {format.isbn} { isbn "isbn" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block "ISBN " swap$ * } if$ } %</isbn> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.issn'} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add function} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate issn for further processing} % \begin{macrocode} %<*issn> FUNCTION {format.issn} { issn "issn" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block "ISSN " swap$ * } if$ } %</issn> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.doi'} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add function} % \begin{macrocode} %<*doi> FUNCTION {format.doi} { doi "doi" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<!html> "\doi{" swap$ * "}" * %<html> "doi:" swap$ * } if$ } %</doi> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`select.language'} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add function} % The \texttt{language} field code has been provided by Bernd Feige, of the % University of Freiburg. % \begin{macrocode} %<*lang> FUNCTION {select.language} { duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { language empty$ 'skip$ { "{\selectlanguage{" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * } if$ } if$ } %</lang> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.note'} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Apr 25}{Add macro} % \changes{3.83}{1997 May 26}{Fix so unmatched brace warning suppressed} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add option \texttt{url-nt}} % Notes should be entered as though they were a sentence on their own. % However, if they appear mid-sentence rather than after a block or sentence, % the first letter must be lowercase. Thus if a note begins with a proper % noun, it must be in braces. To avoid a warning about unmatched braces % with the \texttt{change.case\$} function, check first if the leading % character is an opening brace. % % With options \texttt{url,url-nt}, the URL text is treated as a note, and % added here. It is output directly, not prepended to the note text. This % means, if the note is to be a new sentence, the URL text starts that % sentence, and the regular note is added to that sentence, comma between. % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate note for further processing} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Sep 14}{PWD: remove url with \texttt{revdata}} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.note} { %<*url-nt&!revdata> url empty$ 'skip$ %<!html> { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * output } %<html> { "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$ %<html> * ">" * url * "</a>" * output } if$ %</url-nt&!revdata> note empty$ { "" } { note #1 #1 substring$ duplicate$ "{" = 'skip$ { output.state mid.sentence = { "l" } { "u" } if$ change.case$ } if$ note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.title'} % \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Add enquote function to put titles in quotes, % such that punctuation is inside quotes.} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Apr 17}{Fix bug in quoted title and \texttt{blk-com}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add \texttt{qx} option, for comma outside % quotes} % For a quoted title, any punctuation in the title goes inside the quote. % Otherwise, the comma or period following the title also goes inside. % Exception is with \texttt{qx} option, in which case the comma goes % outside, even when punctuation present; for period (\texttt{!blk-com}) % is added outside only when punctuation is absent. % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate title for further processing.} % \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Put \texttt{change.case\$} before \texttt{bibinfo.check}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.title} { title %<*!atit-u> duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$ %</!atit-u> "title" bibinfo.check %<*tit-it|tit-qq|lang> duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<tit-it> emphasize %<*!tit-it&tit-qq> "\enquote{" swap$ * %<*!qx> %<*blk-com> non.stop %<!com-semi&!com-blank> { ",} " * } %<com-semi> { ";} " * } %<!com-semi&com-blank> { "} " * } { "} " * } if$ %</blk-com> %<!blk-com> add.period$ "}" * %</!qx> %<*qx> %<*blk-com> %<!com-semi&!com-blank> "}, " * %<com-semi> "}; " * %<!com-semi&com-blank> "} " * %</blk-com> %<!blk-com> "}" * %</qx> %</!tit-it&tit-qq> %<lang> select.language } if$ %</tit-it|tit-qq|lang> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`end.quote.title'} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Add macro to finish off quoted titles} % For a quoted title, the punctuation appears in the quotes. For commas % between block, this means the inter-block punctuation is already present, % so it must be suppressed after every \texttt{format.title output}. This % is done by setting the \texttt{output.state} to \texttt{before.all}, but % only if there really was a title. Call this macro every time after % titles are output. % \begin{macrocode} %<*blk-com&tit-qq> FUNCTION {end.quote.title} { title empty$ 'skip$ { before.all 'output.state := } if$ } %</blk-com&tit-qq> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`end.quote.btitle'} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 31}{Add function} % Similar to |end.quote.title| except that it is only applied if titles of % proceedings and collections are quoted, and if % neither \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, nor \texttt{edby-par} are selected % (this is the default case in the relevant menu of the \texttt{makebst.tex} run). % These options add text after the booktitle, % so additional punctuation need not be suppressed. Unless there is no editor! % % Note: this function is called after the result of \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle} % has been output, and attempts to predict what that output had been. % Would it not be better to call this function while that result is still % on the stack? % \begin{macrocode} %<*bt-qq> FUNCTION {end.quote.btitle} { booktitle empty$ 'skip$ %<!edby&!edby-par&!edby-parc> { before.all 'output.state := } %<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc> { editor empty$ { before.all 'output.state := } 'skip$ if$ } %</edby|edby-par|edby-parc> if$ } %</bt-qq> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`make.full.names'} % \changes{1.1}{1993 Nov 12}{Add key labels to \texttt{calc.long.label} and % get {\tt'author} and {\tt'editor} in right order when author % missing.} % \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Remove \texttt{calc.long.label} and % \texttt{format.long.lab.names}, replacing them with % \texttt{format.full.names}, \texttt{make.full.names}, and adding % \texttt{author.editor.key}, \texttt{author.key}, and \texttt{editor.key}} % \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Remove option \texttt{and-com} from % \texttt{make.full.names}} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Add full names for \texttt{natbib} v5.3} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Suppress `and' in full list if suppressed in short} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Font of `and' in lists same as in citations} % \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Fix location of \texttt{and-xcom} code} % In versions before 2.2, there were two functions \texttt{calc.long.label} % and \texttt{format.long.lab.names} that made up the string % \texttt{long.label} for each entry. This contains the full author list. % However, there was a bug in the one routine, entered by mistake when an % earlier bug was removed, and more seriously, the string % \texttt{long.label} was limited to \texttt{entry.max\$} characters, 100 on % my system. Author lists were truncated. Thus, \texttt{make.full.names} % is used instead to enter the full list of names directly in the % \texttt{output.bibitem} function, without an intermediate string. This % involves changing the order of some function definitions, especially % \texttt{output.bibitem} must come later. % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others'' % from last format function} % \changes{3.98}{1999 May 28}{Fix bug with \texttt{harnm}, missing brace} % \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{Format juniors to be same as for \texttt{format.lab.names}} % \begin{macrocode} %<*har|cay|nat> FUNCTION {format.full.names} {'s := "" 't := #1 'nameptr := s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames 'namesleft := { namesleft #0 > } { s nameptr %<!jnrlab> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<*jnrlab> %<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ %<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ %</jnrlab> %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font 't := nameptr #1 > { %<*nmlm> %<m1> nameptr #1 %<m2> nameptr #2 %<m3> nameptr #3 %<m4> nameptr #4 %<m5> nameptr #5 %<m6> nameptr #6 %<m7> nameptr #7 %<m8> nameptr #8 %<m9> nameptr #9 %<m0> nameptr #0 %<m10> #10 + %<m20> #20 + %<m30> #30 + %<m40> #40 + %<m50> #50 + %<m60> #60 + %<m70> #70 + %<m80> #80 + %<m90> #90 + #1 + = %<x1> numnames #1 %<x2> numnames #2 %<x3> numnames #3 %<x4> numnames #4 %<x5> numnames #5 %<x6> numnames #6 %<x7> numnames #7 %<x8> numnames #8 %<x9> numnames #9 %<x0> numnames #0 %<x10> #10 + %<x20> #20 + %<x30> #30 + %<x40> #40 + %<x50> #50 + %<x60> #60 + %<x70> #70 + %<x80> #80 + %<x90> #90 + > and { "others" 't := #1 'namesleft := } 'skip$ if$ %</nmlm> namesleft #1 > { ", " * t * } { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = { 't := } { pop$ } if$ t "others" = { %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * %<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font } { %<*!harnm> %<*!and-xcom> numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$ %</!and-xcom> %<!amper> bbl.and %<amper> "\&" %</!harnm> %<harnm> "\harvardand{}" space.word * t * } if$ } if$ } 't if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ %<*lab&!and-rm> t "others" = 'skip$ { cite.name.font } if$ %</lab&!and-rm> } FUNCTION {author.editor.key.full} { author empty$ { editor empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } 'key if$ } { editor format.full.names } if$ } { author format.full.names } if$ } FUNCTION {author.key.full} { author empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } 'key if$ } { author format.full.names } if$ } FUNCTION {editor.key.full} { editor empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } 'key if$ } { editor format.full.names } if$ } FUNCTION {make.full.names} { type$ "book" = type$ "inbook" = or 'author.editor.key.full { type$ "proceedings" = 'editor.key.full 'author.key.full if$ } if$ } %</har|cay|nat> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`output.bibitem'} %\changes{1.1}{1993 Nov 12}{Test for missing year, set to {\tt????}.} % The \texttt{output.bibitem} function formats the |\bibitem| entries. %\changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Move to later location, add % \texttt{make.full.names} instead of inserting string \texttt{long.label}} %\changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{nat} for full author list % for \texttt{natbib.sty} version~5.3} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Nov 18}{For \texttt{nat}, put label in braces} % A user has pointed out to me that if the label argument in square brackets % are put into braces (within the squares) it is then resistent to any % problems if square braces should appear within the label. Do this, but % only for the \texttt{nat} option. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {output.bibitem} { newline$ %<*!html> %<*ay> %<!har&!nat> "\bibitem[" write$ %<!har&nat> "\bibitem[{" write$ %<har> "\harvarditem" write$ %<nmd> "\protect\citeauthoryear{" write$ %<ast> "\protect\astroncite{" write$ %<cay> "\protect\citeauthoryear{" make.full.names * "}{" * write$ %<cn> "\protect\citename{" write$ %<!har> label write$ %<har> make.full.names duplicate$ label = %<har> 'skip$ %<har> { "[" label * "]" * write$ } %<har> if$ %<har> "{" swap$ * "}{" * write$ %<har> year duplicate$ empty$ %<cn> ", }" year duplicate$ empty$ %<cay|nmd|ast> "}{" year duplicate$ empty$ %<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&blkyear> { pop$ "" } %<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&!blkyear> { pop$ "????" } %<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast> 'skip$ %<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast> if$ %<har> extra.label * "}{" * write$ %<cn> * extra.label * "]{" * write$ %<cay|nmd|ast> * extra.label * "}]{" * write$ %<alk> "]{" write$ %<!(har|cay|nmd|ast|alk|cn|nat)> ")]{" write$ %<nat> ")" make.full.names duplicate$ short.list = %<nat> { pop$ } %<nat> { * } %<nat> if$ %<nat> "}]{" * write$ %</ay> %<!ay&!(cite|alph)> "\bibitem{" write$ %<!ay&(cite|alph)> "\bibitem[" label * "]{" * write$ cite$ write$ "}" write$ newline$ "" %</!html> %<*html> %<*htdes> "<dt><tt>" write$ cite$ write$ "</tt></dt>" write$ newline$ "<dd>" %</htdes> %<htlist&!htdes> "<li>" %<!htlist&!htdes> "" %</html> before.all 'output.state := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`if.digit'} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Add macro} % Add \texttt{if.digit} and \texttt{n.separate} to convert large page numbers % to a separated number. % \begin{macrocode} %<*pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> FUNCTION {if.digit} { duplicate$ "0" = swap$ duplicate$ "1" = swap$ duplicate$ "2" = swap$ duplicate$ "3" = swap$ duplicate$ "4" = swap$ duplicate$ "5" = swap$ duplicate$ "6" = swap$ duplicate$ "7" = swap$ duplicate$ "8" = swap$ "9" = or or or or or or or or or } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`n.separate'} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Add macro for options \texttt{pgsep-c}, % \texttt{pgsep-s}, \texttt{pgsep-p}} % Large page numbers are to be separated in threes, with thin space, comma % or period. The number must be 5 digits before the separation occurs. % No provision is made for numbers of 7 or more digits. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {n.separate} { 't := "" #0 'numnames := { t empty$ not } { t #-1 #1 substring$ if.digit { numnames #1 + 'numnames := } { #0 'numnames := } if$ t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ * t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't := numnames #5 = { duplicate$ #1 #2 substring$ swap$ #3 global.max$ substring$ %<pgsep-c> "," swap$ * * %<pgsep-p> "." swap$ * * %<pgsep-s&!html> "\," swap$ * * %<pgsep-s&html> " " swap$ * * } 'skip$ if$ } while$ } %</pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`n.dashify'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {n.dashify} { %<pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> n.separate 't := "" { t empty$ not } { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not { "--" * t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } { "-" * t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } while$ } if$ } { t #1 #1 substring$ * t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } if$ } while$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`word.in'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Function \texttt{word.in} constructed out of % \texttt{bbl.in} or \texttt{bbl.iin}.} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 16}{Use only \texttt{bbl.in} and capitalize it % as necessary; remove \texttt{bbl.iin}} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add option \texttt{in-x} to suppress `in'} % \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Add option \texttt{in-it} to italicize `in'} % The function \texttt{word.in} prints the word \textsl{in} for references % that are % contained in a larger work, or in conference proceedings. One may have a % colon after the word with the option \texttt{in-col}. If blocks of text are % to be separated with commas (option \texttt{blk-com}) then the word remains % in lower case, as it is defined in \texttt{bbl.in}; but if blocks act as % sentences, then it must be capitalized. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {word.in} %<in-x>{ "" } %<*!in-x> %<blk-com|blk-tita>{ bbl.in %<!blk-com&!blk-tita>{ bbl.in capitalize %<in-col> ":" * %<in-it> emphasize " " * } %</!in-x> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.date'} % \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 6}{Add option \texttt{yr-per} to put period % before date} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{harvard} bracket names to year % with new option \texttt{harnm}} % \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Add \texttt{yr-blk} for no punctuation before % the date} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add \texttt{dtrev} option for year month} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add \texttt{mth-bare} for dotless abbreviation % of months} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add \texttt{volp-dt} for date after volume} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Add brace pair after % \texttt{\char`\\harvardyearright}} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 16}{Add \texttt{aymth} option for months in dates} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Add \texttt{vnum-dt} option} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 12}{Add \texttt{yr-com} option} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 12}{Fix bug that left off extra label for plain year} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{volp-dt} with \texttt{jdt-p}} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{vnum-dt} with \texttt{jdt-vs}} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Add \texttt{jdt-v}} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 10}{Do \texttt{yr-blk} right} % \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Add \texttt{jdt-pc} to add comma after year} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{xmth} to suppress month for numericals} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{For \texttt{harnm}, suppress punctuation before date} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Add \texttt{blkyear} option} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate the date for further processing} % The new \texttt{harvard.sty} allows variable brackets around the date % in the reference list. It uses |\harvardyearleft| and |\harvardyearright| % in the \texttt{.bst} files. Allow this with the option \texttt{harnm}, % which could actually be used without the \texttt{har} option. Note that % this overrides the other year formatting options. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> FUNCTION {format.date} { year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ { %<*!blkyear> "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$ pop$ "????" %</!blkyear> } 'skip$ if$ %<*aymth> month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<dtrev> swap$ " " * swap$ } if$ * %<mth-bare> remove.dots %</aymth> %<dtbf> bolden extra.label * %<*!harnm> %<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per> before.all 'output.state := %<yr-par> " (" swap$ * ")" * %<!yr-par&yr-brk> " [" swap$ * "]" * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col> ": " swap$ * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com> ", " swap$ * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state := %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ * %</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per> %</!harnm> %<harnm> before.all 'output.state := %<harnm> " \harvardyearleft " swap$ * "\harvardyearright{}" * } %</ay> %<*!ay> FUNCTION {format.date} { %<!xmth> month "month" bibinfo.check %<xmth> "" duplicate$ empty$ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ { swap$ 'skip$ { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ } if$ * } { swap$ 'skip$ { %<showstack> month year %<!dtrev> swap$ " " * swap$ } if$ * %<mth-bare> remove.dots } if$ %<dtbf> bolden %<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk> duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { before.all 'output.state := %<yr-par> " (" swap$ * ")" * %<!yr-par&yr-brk> " [" swap$ * "]" * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col> ": " swap$ * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com> ", " swap$ * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state := %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ * } if$ %</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk> } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.year'} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Add function} % For the options that put the year into the journal specifications, use a % special formatter separate from the regular date formatter. % The year is always in parentheses (except for appended to journal name). % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate year for further processing} % \begin{macrocode} %<*jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs> FUNCTION{format.year} { year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ { "empty year in " cite$ * %<ay&!blkyear> "; set to ????" * warning$ %<ay&!blkyear> pop$ "????" } { %<!ay&jdt-vs> " (" swap$ * ")" * %<!ay&!jdt-vs> "(" swap$ * ")" * } if$ %<*ay> extra.label * %<jdt-vs> " (" swap$ * ")" * %<!jdt-vs> "(" swap$ * ")" * %</ay> } %</jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.btitle'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate title for further processing.} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.btitle} { title "title" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!btit-rm> emphasize %<lang> select.language } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`either.or.check'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {either.or.check} { empty$ 'pop$ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.bvolume'} % \changes{4.11}{2003 Jun 23}{Add \texttt{ser-vol}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.bvolume} { volume empty$ { "" } { bbl.volume volume tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ %<*!ser-vol> { swap$ bbl.of space.word * swap$ emphasize * } %</!ser-vol> %<ser-vol> { emphasize ", " * swap$ * } if$ "volume and number" number either.or.check } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.number.series'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.number.series} { volume empty$ { number empty$ { series field.or.null } %<*num-xser> { series empty$ { number "number" bibinfo.check } { output.state mid.sentence = { bbl.number } { bbl.number capitalize } if$ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * * bbl.in space.word * series "series" bibinfo.check * } if$ } %</num-xser> %<*!num-xser> { output.state mid.sentence = { bbl.number } { bbl.number capitalize } if$ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * * series empty$ { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } { bbl.in space.word * series "series" bibinfo.check * } if$ } %</!num-xser> if$ } { "" } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`is.num'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to test for digit.} % \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions} % This function takes the single-character string on the stack and returns % 1 if it is a digit, else 0. % \begin{macrocode} %<*!xedn> FUNCTION {is.num} { chr.to.int$ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`extract.num'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to extract leading number from % a literal string.} % \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions} % This function tests the string on the stack to see if it begins with a % number. If so, that number is left on the stack; if the string contains % no numbers at the start, it is left unchanged. The idea is to convert % \textsl{1st} to \textsl{1} and leave \textsl{first} as is. % This is used by {\tt convert.edition}. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {extract.num} { duplicate$ 't := "" 's := { t empty$ not } { t #1 #1 substring$ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := duplicate$ is.num { s swap$ * 's := } { pop$ "" 't := } if$ } while$ s empty$ 'skip$ { pop$ s } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`convert.edition'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to convert \texttt{edition} entry % text from word to a function} % \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: change calling sequence: arg on stack} % The function \texttt{convert.edition} takes the text in the field % \texttt{edition} and changes it to the language-specific equivalent. As % originally planned for \btx, this field should contain the words % \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc. Being so explicit, % it is not so easy to translate, nor to % convert to \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd}, etc., if one wanted. % This function carries out the translation, by changing % \textsl{first} or \textsl{1} to \texttt{bbl.first}, and so % on. The field is reduced to lower case to make it case insensitive. If no % translation is found, then the original text in \texttt{edition} is used % instead, as it stands. However, if the original is a number greater than % the maximum for which text is provided, then \texttt{bbl.th} is added to % it. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {convert.edition} { extract.num "l" change.case$ 's := s "first" = s "1" = or { bbl.first 't := } { s "second" = s "2" = or { bbl.second 't := } { s "third" = s "3" = or { bbl.third 't := } { s "fourth" = s "4" = or { bbl.fourth 't := } { s "fifth" = s "5" = or { bbl.fifth 't := } { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num %<!english&exlang> { s bbl.th * 't := } %<english|!exlang> { s eng.ord 't := } { edition 't := } if$ } if$ } if$ } if$ } if$ } if$ t } %</!xedn> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.edition'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add call to \texttt{convert.edition}} % This function formats the text for the edition specification, such as % ``Second edition''. It combines the edition number with the word % \textsl{edition}. % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate edition for further processing.} % \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Put \texttt{change.case\$} before \texttt{bibinfo.check}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.edition} { edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!xedn> convert.edition output.state mid.sentence = { "l" } { "t" } if$ change.case$ "edition" bibinfo.check " " * bbl.edition * } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { multiresult } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`multi.page.check'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {multi.page.check} { 't := #0 'multiresult := { multiresult not t empty$ not and } { t #1 #1 substring$ duplicate$ "-" = swap$ duplicate$ "," = swap$ "+" = or or { #1 'multiresult := } { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } if$ } while$ multiresult } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.pages'} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 24}{Add option \texttt{bkpg-par}} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add option \texttt{bkpg-x}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Dec 10}{Add \texttt{!ppx} test to avoid extra space} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.pages} { pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { duplicate$ multi.page.check { %<!bkpg-x&!ppx> bbl.pages swap$ n.dashify } { %<!bkpg-x&!ppx> bbl.page swap$ } if$ %<!bkpg-x&!ppx> tie.or.space.prefix "pages" bibinfo.check %<!bkpg-x&!ppx> * * %<bkpg-par> "(" swap$ * ")" * } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`first.page'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*jpg-1> FUNCTION {first.page} { 't := "" { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } { t #1 #1 substring$ * t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } while$ } %</jpg-1> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.journal.pages'} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Remove from \texttt{format.vol.num.pages} to % be a separate function} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Remove option \texttt{vnum-pg}} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{volp-dt} with \texttt{jdt-p}} % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.} % % Note: this function gets called with something on the stack. % It may be the volume and number. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.journal.pages} { pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ pop$ format.pages } { %<volp-sp> ": " * %<*!volp-sp> %<volp-blk> " " * %<*!volp-blk> %<volp-com> ", " * %<*!volp-com> %<volp-semi> "; " * %<!volp-semi> ":" * %</!volp-com> %</!volp-blk> %</!volp-sp> %<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&jdt-p> format.year * " " * %<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&!jdt-p&jdt-pc> format.year * ", " * swap$ %<jpg-1> first.page %<!jpg-1> n.dashify %<*jwdpg> pages multi.page.check 'bbl.pages 'bbl.page if$ swap$ tie.or.space.prefix %</jwdpg> "pages" bibinfo.check %<jwdpg> * * * } if$ } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.journal.eid'} % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add function to emit the eid information.} % This function is called with something on the stack (journal vol, number) % and appends \texttt{eid} and \texttt{numpages} if those field are non-empty. % Very similar to \texttt{format.journal.pages}. % % For the AGU style of including the DOI as part of the EID, the DOI number % is appended too. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.journal.eid} { eid "eid" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<volp-sp> ": " * %<*!volp-sp> %<volp-blk> " " * %<*!volp-blk> %<volp-com> ", " * %<*!volp-com> %<volp-semi> "; " * %<!volp-semi> ":" * %</!volp-com> %</!volp-blk> %</!volp-sp> } if$ swap$ * %<*revdata> numpages empty$ 'skip$ { bbl.eidpp numpages tie.or.space.prefix "numpages" bibinfo.check * * " (" swap$ * ")" * * } if$ %</revdata> } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.vol.num.pages'} % \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 6}{Add option \texttt{volp-sp} to put space % after colon in vol:~page.} % \changes{1.5(2.3)c}{1995 Jan 20}{Add options \texttt{vnum-h}, % \texttt{vnum-nr} and \texttt{vnum-x} for various formats of % journal vol number} % \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Add options \texttt{vnum-sp} and % \texttt{vnum-cm}} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 17}{Add option \texttt{volp-semi}} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Put \texttt{bolden} in right place for % \texttt{vol-2bf} option} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Put date between volume and number} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Add possibilitity of `page' word} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Activate \texttt{jwdpg} option properly} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add possibilitity of `volume' word} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Add option \texttt{pp-last}} % Version 3.84, I have rationalized several options that placed the date in the % journal specifications. It was rather chaotic before, but now it should be % more systematic. This means some options have been removed, something that I % do not like to do. % % The option \texttt{pp-last} suppresses the pages in the formatting macros, and % sees to it that the pages are added just before any notes in those entries % that take pages. This applies to more than just \texttt{article}, but to % \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection} as well. % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate the volume and number for % further processing.} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} { volume field.or.null duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<jwdvol> bbl.volume swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check %<jwdvol> * * } if$ %<vol-bf&!vol-2bf> bolden %<!vol-bf&!vol-2bf&vol-it> emphasize %<jdt-v|jdt-vs> format.year * %<*!vnum-x> number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } 'skip$ if$ swap$ %<vnum-sp> "~(" swap$ * ")" * %<!vnum-sp&vnum-cm> ", " swap$ * %<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&vnum-nr> ", " bbl.nr * number tie.or.space.prefix pop$ * swap$ * %<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&vnum-h> ", \#" swap$ * %<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&vnum-b> " " swap$ * %<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&!vnum-b> "(" swap$ * ")" * } if$ * %<!vol-bf&vol-2bf> bolden %</!vnum-x> %<*!pp-last> eid empty$ { format.journal.pages } { format.journal.eid } if$ %</!pp-last> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.chapter.pages'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate series and chapter for % further processing.} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} { chapter empty$ %<!pp-last> 'format.pages %<pp-last> { "" } { type empty$ { bbl.chapter } { type "l" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check } if$ chapter tie.or.space.prefix "chapter" bibinfo.check * * %<*!pp-last> pages empty$ 'skip$ { ", " * format.pages * } if$ %</!pp-last> } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`bt.enquote'} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 31}{Add function} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: trap \texttt{empty\$} argument} % This is to place the booktitle for proceedings and collections into quotes. % If punctuation is to be included, then add a comma unless a stop already % exists, or add a period under the only circumstances that % |format.in.ed.booktitle| is followed by |new.sentence|. % \begin{macrocode} %<*bt-qq> FUNCTION {bt.enquote} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "\enquote{" swap$ * %<*!qx> non.stop { ",} " * } { "}, " * } if$ %</!qx> %<*qx> "}, " * %</qx> } if$ } %</bt-qq> % \end{macrocode} % % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.booktitle'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: new function} % The function \texttt{format.booktitle} pushes one object % (the book title, suitably encapsulated) onto the stack. % It is currently used in \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref} % and in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}, and should be used whenever accessing % the \texttt{booktitle} field for eventual output. % % If the book title is empty or missing, the function pushes an empty string. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.booktitle} { booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check %<!bt-qq&!bt-rm> emphasize %<bt-qq> bt.enquote } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.in.ed.booktitle'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Add option \texttt{edby-par} to put editors % in parentheses} % \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{If \texttt{ed} and \texttt{edby} given % together, abbreviate `edited by' to `ed(s).'} % \changes{3.1}{1995 May 2}{Add option \texttt{edbyx} to replace `edited by' % by `ed(s).'} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Add option \texttt{edcap}} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 10}{Fix bug that added extra space sometimes} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Book titles may also be roman} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{New options \texttt{edby-parc} and \texttt{edbyw}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: rewritten; encapsulates \texttt{booktitle} and % \texttt{editor} for later processing} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Sept 17}{PWD: fix up several bugs} % Prior to version 3.81, the \textsl{Editor} or \textsl{Edited by} in % parentheses was meant to be capitalized, but this did not work properly. % Now the option \texttt{edcap} produces this, and default is not capitalized. % % Notes on \dtx{} options: % \begin{itemize} % \item % The following combinations are available through the \texttt{makebst.tex} interface: % \begin{verbatim} % ( % <default> % |edby ( |edbyx |edbyy|edbyw[edcap]) % |edby-par (|edcap|edbyx[edcap]|edbyy ) % |edby-parc(|edcap|edbyx ) % ) % \end{verbatim} % \item % \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, and \texttt{edby-parc} are mutually exclusive % and, except for the default, exhaustive. % \item % \texttt{edbyx}, \texttt{edbyw}, and \texttt{edbyy} are mutually exclusive % and, except for the default, exhaustive. % \item % \texttt{edcap} is independent of the above two groups of options. % \item % When parentheses need to be applied, we make sure that the respective % \dtx{} guard expressions are mutually exclusive. % It makes no sense for \texttt{edbyw} to be in effect if either of % \texttt{edby-par} or \texttt{edby-parc} is in effect. % \item % \texttt{makebst.tex} only activates \texttt{edcap} in certain cases, % but we do no checking here, applying it consistently to the % ``editor'' text entity. % \item % The code between \texttt{<!edpar>} and \verb+<edpar\|edparc>+ % \emph{must} match the corresponding code in \texttt{format.editors}. % This means that in the default case, formatting is controlled by % a \dtx{} mechanism entirely different from the other cases. % \item \texttt{ser-ed} has been added to suit AGU. Result of series plus % volume to go between booktitle and editors; must remove \texttt{format.bvolume} % from \texttt{incollection} and \texttt{inproceedings}. % \end{itemize} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} { format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<showstack>% btitle %<*ser-ed> format.bvolume duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { ", " swap$ * * } if$ %</ser-ed> editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { %<*!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)> %<showstack>% btitle ednms %<!edpar&!edparxc> "," * " " * get.bbl.editor %<bkedcap> capitalize %<edpar> "(" swap$ * "), " * %<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)> "(" swap$ * ") " * %<!edpar&!(edparc|edparxc)> ", " * * swap$ %<showstack>% eds btitle %</!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)> %<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc> %<showstack>% btitle ednms %<edbyx|edbyy|edbyw> get.bbl.editor %<!(edbyx|edbyy|edbyw)> bbl.edby %<edcap> capitalize %<!(edby-par|edby-parc)&edbyw> "(" swap$ * ")" * %<showstack>% btitle ednms ed %<(edby-par|edby)&edbyy> swap$ "," * " " * swap$ * %<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed %<(edby-par|edby-parc)&!edbyw> "(" swap$ * ")" * swap$ %<edby|edby-parc> "," * " " * swap$ %</edby|edby-par|edby-parc> %<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed (or ednms-ed btitle) * } if$ %<showstack>% btitle-ednms-ed (or ednms-ed-btitle) (or btitle) word.in swap$ * } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`empty.misc.check'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} { author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ and and and and and %<!seq-no|alph> key empty$ not and { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } 'skip$ if$ } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.thesis.type'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} { type duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { swap$ pop$ "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.tr.number'} % \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Encapsulate number} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.tr.number} { number "number" bibinfo.check type duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ bbl.techrep } 'skip$ if$ "type" bibinfo.check swap$ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "t" change.case$ } { tie.or.space.prefix * * } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.article.crossref'} %\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{journal} with % \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate journal for further processing.} % The \texttt{journal} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be % done by command. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} { %<*!ay> key duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ journal duplicate$ empty$ { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ } { "journal" bibinfo.check emphasize word.in swap$ * } if$ } { word.in swap$ * " " *} if$ %</!ay> %<ay> word.in %<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * %<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" * } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.crossref.editor'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: editor encapsulated for later processing} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: fixed typo: "etal_rm"->"etal-rm"} % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} { editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check editor num.names$ duplicate$ #2 > { pop$ %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check " " * bbl.etal %<etal-it> emphasize * %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> "others" 't := } { #2 < 'skip$ { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = { %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check " " * bbl.etal %<etal-it> emphasize * %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> "others" 't := } { %<*!harnm> %<!amper> bbl.and space.word %<amper> " \& " %</!harnm> %<harnm> " \harvardand\ " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check * } if$ } if$ } if$ %<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm> t "others" = 'skip$ { bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check } if$ %</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm> } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.book.crossref'} %\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{series} with % \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate volume and series for % further processing.} % The \texttt{series} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be % done by command. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} { volume duplicate$ empty$ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ pop$ word.in } { bbl.volume %<!(blk-com|blk-tita)> capitalize swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word * } if$ %<*!ay> editor empty$ editor field.or.null author field.or.null = or { key empty$ { series empty$ { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ "" * } { series emphasize * } if$ } { key * } if$ } { format.crossref.editor * } if$ %</!ay> %<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * %<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" * } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.incoll.inproc.crossref'} %\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{booktitle} with % \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.booktitle}} % The \texttt{booktitle} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be % done by command. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} { %<*!ay> editor empty$ editor field.or.null author field.or.null = or { key empty$ { format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ } { word.in swap$ * } if$ } { word.in key * " " *} if$ } { word.in format.crossref.editor * " " *} if$ %</!ay> %<ay> word.in %<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * %<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" * } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.org.or.pub'} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Add option \texttt{add-pub} which makes use % of this function} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Add option \texttt{pub-par} to put publisher % in parentheses} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{pub-date} to put publisher % and date in parentheses together} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Add \texttt{add.blank} for \texttt{pub-par}} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add extra label with \texttt{pub-date}} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Option \texttt{pub-nopar} to suppress parentheses % with \texttt{pub-date}} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Change to include organization if present} % \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Include \texttt{dtbf} option with \texttt{pub-date}} % Psychology journals often want \textit{address}: \textit{publisher}. % % \textsl{Nature} wants publisher and date in parentheses, and when both % are there, they are merged into one set. % % Call function \texttt{add.blank} before parentheses so suppress preceding % punctuation, which looks strange when publisher in parentheses. % % MPG Jahrbuch wants publisher and year, but without parentheses. Add % \texttt{pub-nopar} to be used with \texttt{pub-date}. % % Have now (3.87.h) extended this function to include the organization, if % present. This is for \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings} where % the publisher is optional, and organization too. If the publisher is missing, % but the organization present, it is formatted like the publisher. This % complication comes from styles that want the publisher/organization to have % the date included, all in parentheses. % % This function is called by \texttt{format.publisher.address} and % \texttt{format.organization.address}, each putting the appropriate text % into the stack first. % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate address and year for % further processing.} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub} { 't := "" %<*pub-date&!ay> year empty$ { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } 'skip$ if$ %</pub-date&!ay> %<*!(pub-date&ay)> address empty$ t empty$ and %<pub-date> year empty$ and 'skip$ { %</!(pub-date&ay)> %<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)> add.blank "(" * %<*add-pub> address "address" bibinfo.check * t empty$ 'skip$ %</add-pub> %<*!add-pub> t empty$ { address "address" bibinfo.check * } { t * address empty$ 'skip$ { ", " * address "address" bibinfo.check * } if$ } %</!add-pub> %<*add-pub> { address empty$ 'skip$ { ": " * } if$ t * } %</add-pub> if$ %<*pub-date&!ay> year empty$ 'skip$ { t empty$ address empty$ and 'skip$ { ", " * } if$ year "year" bibinfo.check %<dtbf> bolden * } if$ %</pub-date&!ay> %<*pub-date&ay> year duplicate$ empty$ %<*!blkyear> { "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$ pop$ "????" } %</!blkyear> %<*blkyear> { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ pop$ "" } %</blkyear> %<!dtbf> { "year" bibinfo.check extra.label * } %<dtbf> { "year" bibinfo.check bolden extra.label * } if$ t empty$ address empty$ and { * } %<!pub-xc> { ", " swap$ * * } %<pub-xc> { " " swap$ * * } if$ %</pub-date&ay> %<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)> ")" * %<*!(pub-date&ay)> } if$ %</!(pub-date&ay)> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.publisher.address'} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Add macro; works with \texttt{format.org.or.pub}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate \texttt{publisher} % and \texttt{organization}} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 28}{Check with \texttt{bibinfo.warn}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.publisher.address} { publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.organization.address'} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Add macro; works with \texttt{format.org.or.pub}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.organization.address} { organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`name.or.dash'} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Add function to replace repeated names by dash} % \changes{4.06}{2003 Apr 2}{Add double and triple dashes} % This function stores what is on the stack, compares it with previous value, % and replaces it with a long dash if they are equal. What is on the stack % should be author or editor names for the current entry. % \begin{macrocode} %<*nmdash> STRINGS {oldname} FUNCTION {name.or.dash} { 's := oldname empty$ { s 'oldname := s } { s oldname = %<*!au-col> %<!nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---" } %<nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---{}---" } %<nmd-3> { "---{}---{}---" } %</!au-col> %<*au-col> %<!nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---" add.blank } %<nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---{}---" add.blank } %<nmd-3> { "---{}---{}---" add.blank } %</au-col> { s 'oldname := s } if$ } if$ } %</nmdash> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`article'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Add option \texttt{yrp-x} to suppress % punctuation following date at beginning} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 8}{Add option \texttt{yrp-col} to add colon after % date at beginning} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{jxper} to remove periods % from journal name} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add option \texttt{dt-jnl} to make date part of % the journal specification, follows journal name.} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add option \texttt{au-col}} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Add option \texttt{jttl-rm}} % \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Put \texttt{purify\$} before \texttt{emphasize}} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Add option \texttt{blk-tita} for article only} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Add option \texttt{blknt} for period before notes} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{injnl} for `in' with journal % names} % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.journal} and % \texttt{format.journal.eid}; call \texttt{format.eprint}, and % \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Fix bug with texttt{injnl}} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {article} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<*dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> format.date "year" output.check date.block %</dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*!jtit-x> format.title "title" output.check %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*blk-tit|blk-tita> %<!tit-col> new.sentence %<tit-col> add.colon %</blk-tit|blk-tita> %</!jtit-x> crossref missing$ { journal %<jxper> remove.dots "journal" bibinfo.check %<!jttl-rm> emphasize %<injnl> word.in swap$ * "journal" output.check %<jnm-x> add.blank %<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> format.date "year" output.check date.block %</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> format.vol.num.pages output %<doi&agu-doi> format.doi output %<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> } { format.article.crossref output.nonnull %<!pp-last> format.pages output } if$ %<*pp-last> eid empty$ { format.journal.pages } { format.journal.eid } if$ %</pp-last> %<issn> format.issn output %<doi&!agu-doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<*revdata> format.url output %</revdata> fin.entry %<harnm|url-nl> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`book'} %\changes{2.0a}{1994 Aug 30}{Fix up \texttt{new.sentence} so not added with % \texttt{blk-com}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {book} { output.bibitem author empty$ { format.editors "author and editor" output.check %<ay> editor format.key output %<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)&!au-col> add.blank %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash } { format.authors output.nonnull %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash crossref missing$ { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } 'skip$ if$ } if$ %<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check crossref missing$ { format.bvolume output %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %<!numser> format.number.series output %<pre-edn> format.edition output %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output %<pg-bk&pg-pre> format.book.pages output format.publisher.address output } { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon format.book.crossref output.nonnull %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&pub-date> format.date "year" output.check } if$ %<!pre-edn> format.edition output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<isbn> format.isbn output %<pg-bk&!pg-pre> format.book.pages output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`booklet'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {booklet} { output.bibitem format.authors output %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.title "title" output.check %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output address "address" bibinfo.check output %<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output %<isbn> format.isbn output %<pg-bk> format.book.pages output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date output %</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`inbook'} % \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Use \texttt{format.date} in place of % \texttt{year} alone} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % The medical journals, with option \texttt{dt-jnl}, have the date as part of % the journal specification. For chapters in books, they want date and pages % to appear at the end, with a space between them. (For journals, there is to be % no space.) Suppress the chapter specification (for now). % % The \texttt{dt-jnl} option usually behaves as the default, except for some % special entries, like this one. % % \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Restore chap specification with \texttt{dt-jnl} option.} % Restore the chapter specification (2004 Feb 9) after someone complained. % There are still some bugs here. If some date punctuation is specified, say % with \texttt{yrp-semi} for a semi-colon after the year, this appears always, % even if there is no text following. But then this to be an unlikely wish anyway, % since such punctuation options are best suited for \texttt{dt-beg}. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {inbook} { output.bibitem author empty$ { format.editors "author and editor" output.check %<ay> editor format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash } { format.authors output.nonnull %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash crossref missing$ { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } 'skip$ if$ } if$ %<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check crossref missing$ { %<pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output %<pre-pub> format.publisher.address output format.bvolume output %<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check %</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %<!numser> format.number.series output %<pre-edn> format.edition output %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<!pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output %<!pre-pub> format.publisher.address output } { %<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check %</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon format.book.crossref output.nonnull %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&pub-date> format.date "year" output.check } if$ %<!pre-edn> format.edition output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<*isbn> crossref missing$ { format.isbn output } 'skip$ if$ %</isbn> %<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check date.block %</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> %<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`incollection'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} % \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Restore chap specification with \texttt{dt-jnl} option.} FUNCTION {incollection} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*!jtit-x> format.title "title" output.check %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %</!jtit-x> crossref missing$ { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check %<bt-qq> end.quote.btitle %<pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output %<pre-pub> format.publisher.address output %<!ser-ed> format.bvolume output %<!numser> format.number.series output %<pre-edn> format.edition output format.chapter.pages output %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<!pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output %<!pre-pub> format.publisher.address output %<!pre-edn> format.edition output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<isbn> format.isbn output } { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull format.chapter.pages output } if$ %<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check date.block %</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> %<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`inproceedings'} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Reorganize organization/publisher} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 5}{Fix extraneous page output without % \texttt{pp-last}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.05}{2002 Oct 21}{Fix bug with \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-beg}} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {inproceedings} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*!jtit-x> format.title "title" output.check %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %</!jtit-x> crossref missing$ { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check %<bt-qq> end.quote.btitle %<*!pre-pub> %<!ser-ed> format.bvolume output %<!numser> format.number.series output %<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output %</!pre-pub> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output publisher empty$ { format.organization.address output } { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output format.publisher.address output } if$ %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<*pre-pub> format.bvolume output %<!numser> format.number.series output %<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output %</pre-pub> %<isbn> format.isbn output %<issn> format.issn output } { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull %<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output } if$ %<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last> %<!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<!pub-date> date.block %<jdt-v|jdt-vs|jdt-p|!jdt-pc> add.blank format.pages "pages" output.check %</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last> %<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`conference'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`manual'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> FUNCTION {manual} { output.bibitem format.authors output author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> organization address new.block.checkb organization "organization" bibinfo.check output address "address" bibinfo.check output format.edition output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } %</ay> %<*!ay> FUNCTION {manual} { output.bibitem author empty$ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { output address "address" bibinfo.check output } if$ } { format.authors output.nonnull } if$ %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon author empty$ { organization empty$ { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> address new.block.checka address "address" bibinfo.check output } 'skip$ if$ } { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> organization address new.block.checkb organization "organization" bibinfo.check output address "address" bibinfo.check output } if$ format.edition output %<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date output %</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`mastersthesis'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Feb 7}{Add \texttt{thtit-a} to format thesis titles like % articles instead of books.} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: school via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call % \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add \texttt{thtit-x}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % To format a master's thesis. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {mastersthesis} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*!thtit-x> %<!thtit-a> format.btitle %<thtit-a> format.title "title" output.check %<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %</!thtit-x> bbl.mthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull school "school" bibinfo.warn output address "address" bibinfo.check output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`misc'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {misc} { output.bibitem format.authors output %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output %<*ay> %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.title output %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %</ay> %<*!ay> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> title howpublished new.block.checkb format.title output %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> howpublished new.block.checka %</!ay> howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output %<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date output %</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url %<!ay> empty.misc.check } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`phdthesis'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Feb 7}{Add \texttt{thtit-a} to format thesis titles like % articles instead of books.} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: school via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call % \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add \texttt{thtit-x}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % To format a doctoral thesis. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {phdthesis} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*!thtit-x> %<!thtit-a> format.btitle %<thtit-a> format.title "title" output.check %<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %</!thtit-x> bbl.phdthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull school "school" bibinfo.warn output address "address" bibinfo.check output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`presentation'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*pres> FUNCTION {presentation} { output.bibitem format.authors output %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.title output %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check month "month" output.check year "year" output.check %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output new.sentence type missing$ 'skip$ {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output} if$ %<*url-blk&!harnm> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm> fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } %</pres> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`proceedings'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \changes{4.16}{2006 Feb 15}{For numerical, the number/series could be missing when editor there; fixed} % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> FUNCTION {proceedings} { output.bibitem format.editors output editor format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check format.bvolume output %<!numser> format.number.series output %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output publisher empty$ { format.organization.address output } { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output format.publisher.address output } if$ %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<isbn> format.isbn output %<issn> format.issn output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } %</ay> %<*!ay> FUNCTION {proceedings} { output.bibitem editor empty$ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output } { format.editors output.nonnull } if$ %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check format.bvolume output %<!numser> format.number.series output editor empty$ { publisher empty$ %<numser> { format.number.series output } { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output format.publisher.address output } if$ } { publisher empty$ { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output format.organization.address output } { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output organization "organization" bibinfo.check output format.publisher.address output } if$ } if$ %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<isbn> format.isbn output %<issn> format.issn output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`techreport'} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 4}{Add option \texttt{trtit-b}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{trnum-it}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: institution via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call % \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {techreport} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<trtit-b> format.btitle %<!trtit-b> format.title "title" output.check %<!trtit-b&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %<!trnum-it> format.tr.number output.nonnull %<trnum-it> format.tr.number emphasize output.nonnull institution "institution" bibinfo.warn output address "address" bibinfo.check output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`unpublished'} % \changes{3.85}{1997 Nov 25}{Fix date at normal end} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {unpublished} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.title "title" output.check %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note "note" output.check %<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date output %</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date output %</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`default.type'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} READ % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay|alph|!seq-no> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`sortify'} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Do not allow unsorted alphas} % In \texttt{btxbst.doc}/\texttt{.mbs}, the \texttt{sortify} function is % left out for unsorted alpha-style citations. This leads to an error, % because it is still used. So leave it in here too. \emph{In fact, do away % with unsorted alpha style, since it is as useless as unsorted author--year % listings.} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {sortify} { purify$ "l" change.case$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { len } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`chop.word'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {chop.word} { 's := 'len := s #1 len substring$ = { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } 's if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`format.lab.names'} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add option \texttt{alph} for \texttt{alpha.bst} % style of labels} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Nov 4}{Add options \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f}} % \changes{3.85}{1997 Dec 1}{Add option \texttt{jnrlab}} % \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font} % The function \texttt{format.lab.names} formats by author--year or the % \texttt{alpha} style as in the original \texttt{alpha.bst}. % Only major difference is that there should be no unsorted (\texttt{seq-no}) % versions of this. Patashnik was clearly very unhappy about accommodating % such an animal, and in fact, his unsorted alpha style crashes \btx. % I also provide the \texttt{vonx} option here to ignore the \textsl{von} % part of the name. % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { et.al.char.used } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used} { #0 'et.al.char.used := } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.lab.names} { 's := %<*alf-1> %<!vonx> s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ %<vonx> s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ text.length$ #2 < { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ } 'skip$ if$ %</alf-1> %<*!alf-1&alf-f> %<!vonx> s #1 "{vv{}}{ll}" format.name$ %<vonx> s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ %</!alf-1&alf-f> %<*!alf-1&!alf-f> s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames #1 > { numnames #4 > { #3 'namesleft := } { numnames 'namesleft := } if$ #1 'nameptr := "" { namesleft #0 > } { nameptr numnames = { s nameptr "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = { "{\etalchar{+}}" * #1 'et.al.char.used := } %<!vonx> { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } %<vonx> { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * } if$ } %<!vonx> { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } %<vonx> { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * } if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ numnames #4 > { "{\etalchar{+}}" * #1 'et.al.char.used := } 'skip$ if$ } %<!vonx> { s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ %<vonx> { s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ text.length$ #2 < { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ } 'skip$ if$ } if$ %</!alf-1&!alf-f> } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others'' % from last format function} % The function for the standard citation: one or two authors cited full, but for % more than two, only the first with \emph{et~al.} given. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay&!mcite> FUNCTION {format.lab.names} { 's := "" 't := %<!jnrlab> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<*jnrlab> %<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ %<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ %</jnrlab> %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font s num.names$ duplicate$ #2 > { pop$ %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * %<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<lab&!and-rm> "others" 't := } { #2 < 'skip$ { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = { % %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * %<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<lab&!and-rm> "others" 't := } %<*!harnm> %<*!amper> { bbl.and space.word * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font * } %</!amper> %<*amper> { " \& " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font * } %</amper> %</!harnm> %<*harnm> { " \harvardand{} " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font * } %</harnm> if$ } if$ } if$ %<*lab&!and-rm> t "others" = 'skip$ { cite.name.font } if$ %</lab&!and-rm> } %</ay&!mcite> % \end{macrocode} % % \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{Add citations with more than one author with \emph{et~al.}} % \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 24}{Select number of authors before truncating} % The code for formating author--year citations with more than one author % before \emph{et al.} or selecting a number other than two for truncating, % is much the same as the \texttt{format.full.names} function. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay&mcite> FUNCTION {format.lab.names} {'s := "" 't := #1 'nameptr := s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames 'namesleft := { namesleft #0 > } { s nameptr %<!jnrlab> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<*jnrlab> %<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ %<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ %</jnrlab> %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font 't := nameptr #1 > { %<mct-1> nameptr #2 = %<mct-2> nameptr #3 = %<mct-3> nameptr #4 = %<mct-4> nameptr #5 = %<mct-5> nameptr #6 = %<mct-x2> numnames #2 > and %<mct-x3> numnames #3 > and %<mct-x4> numnames #4 > and %<mct-x5> numnames #5 > and { "others" 't := #1 'namesleft := } 'skip$ if$ namesleft #1 > { ", " * t * } { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = { 't := } { pop$ } if$ t "others" = { %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * %<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font } { %<*!harnm> %<*!and-xcom> numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$ %</!and-xcom> %<!amper> bbl.and %<amper> "\&" %</!harnm> %<harnm> "\harvardand{}" space.word * t * } if$ } if$ } 't if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ %<*lab&!and-rm> t "others" = 'skip$ { cite.name.font } if$ %</lab&!and-rm> } %</ay&mcite> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`author.key.label'} % \begin{macro}{`author.editor.key.label'} % \begin{macro}{`author.key.organization.label'} % \begin{macro}{`editor.key.organization.label'} % \begin{macro}{`editor.key.label'} % Have to be very careful with the options \texttt{ay}, \texttt{alph}, and % \texttt{seq-no} here. The first two are actually mutually exclusive, and % \texttt{ay} should dominate. The \texttt{seq-no} option only applies for % numerical (\texttt{!ay}) but not alphabetic (\texttt{alph}) selections. % This whole block of coding dealing with labels is only included for % author--year or alphabetic or ordered numerical. % That is, \texttt{ay} or \texttt{alph} or \texttt{!seq-no} is true. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay|alph> FUNCTION {author.key.label} { author empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } %<ay> 'key %<!ay> { key #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { author format.lab.names } if$ } FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} { author empty$ { editor empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } %<ay> 'key %<!ay> { key #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { editor format.lab.names } if$ } { author format.lab.names } if$ } %</ay|alph> %<*!ay&alph> FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} { author empty$ { key empty$ { organization empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { key #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { author format.lab.names } if$ } FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} { editor empty$ { key empty$ { organization empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { key #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { editor format.lab.names } if$ } %</!ay&alph> %<*ay> FUNCTION {editor.key.label} { editor empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } 'key if$ } { editor format.lab.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`calc.short.authors'} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Add function to store short list of authors % for later test} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {calc.short.authors} { type$ "book" = type$ "inbook" = or 'author.editor.key.label { type$ "proceedings" = 'editor.key.label 'author.key.label if$ } if$ 'short.list := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`calc.label'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)a}{1994 Oct 11}{Add option \texttt{note-yr}} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Add options \texttt{lab-bf} and \texttt{lab-sc}} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Use \texttt{calc.short.authors}} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add \texttt{calc.label} from \texttt{alpha.bst}} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Add \texttt{keyxyr} option} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {calc.label} { calc.short.authors short.list %<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn)> "(" %<har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn> ", " * year duplicate$ empty$ %<keyxyr> short.list key field.or.null = or %<(blkyear|keyxyr)> { pop$ "" } %<!(blkyear|keyxyr)> { pop$ "????" } %<!note-yr> { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } %<note-yr> 'skip$ if$ * 'label := } %</ay> %<*!ay&alph> FUNCTION {calc.label} { type$ "book" = type$ "inbook" = or 'author.editor.key.label { type$ "proceedings" = 'editor.key.organization.label { type$ "manual" = 'author.key.organization.label 'author.key.label if$ } if$ } if$ duplicate$ year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #2 substring$ * 'label := year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ * sortify 'sort.label := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*har|cay|nmd|ast|cn> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`calc.short.label'} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Use \texttt{calc.short.authors}} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {calc.short.label} { calc.short.authors short.list 'label := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</har|cay|nmd|ast|cn> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`sort.format.names'} % \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Make ordering of `et al' works by year % and authors and not just year} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Option \texttt{nm-revf} to act just as default} % \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 16}{Add option \texttt{vonx} so sorting ignores the % \emph{von} part of the name} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{For limited authors, sort only on those present} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{`Et al' considered author before all others} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{`Et al' considered author after all others} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {sort.format.names} { 's := #1 'nameptr := "" s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames 'namesleft := { namesleft #0 > } { s nameptr %<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv> %<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" %<vonx> "{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" %</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv> %<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv> %<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" %<vonx> "{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" %</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv> format.name$ 't := nameptr #1 > { %<*nmlm> %<m1> nameptr #1 %<m2> nameptr #2 %<m3> nameptr #3 %<m4> nameptr #4 %<m5> nameptr #5 %<m6> nameptr #6 %<m7> nameptr #7 %<m8> nameptr #8 %<m9> nameptr #9 %<m0> nameptr #0 %<m10> #10 + %<m20> #20 + %<m30> #30 + %<m40> #40 + %<m50> #50 + %<m60> #60 + %<m70> #70 + %<m80> #80 + %<m90> #90 + #1 + = %<x1> numnames #1 %<x2> numnames #2 %<x3> numnames #3 %<x4> numnames #4 %<x5> numnames #5 %<x6> numnames #6 %<x7> numnames #7 %<x8> numnames #8 %<x9> numnames #9 %<x0> numnames #0 %<x10> #10 + %<x20> #20 + %<x30> #30 + %<x40> #40 + %<x50> #50 + %<x60> #60 + %<x70> #70 + %<x80> #80 + %<x90> #90 + > and { "others" 't := #1 'namesleft := } 'skip$ if$ %</nmlm> " " * namesleft #1 = t "others" = and { "zzzzz" * } %<*seq-lab|seq-key> { numnames #2 > nameptr #2 = and { "zz" * year field.or.null * " " * } 'skip$ if$ t sortify * } %</seq-lab|seq-key> %<!seq-lab&!seq-key> { t sortify * } if$ } { t sortify * } if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`sort.format.title'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {sort.format.title} { 't := "A " #2 "An " #3 "The " #4 t chop.word chop.word chop.word sortify #1 global.max$ substring$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`author.sort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {author.sort} { author empty$ { key empty$ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" } { key sortify } if$ } { author sort.format.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`author.editor.sort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} { author empty$ { editor empty$ { key empty$ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" } { key sortify } if$ } { editor sort.format.names } if$ } { author sort.format.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`negate.year'} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add function for ordering by descending years} % This function negates the year by substituting each digit by its % complement. That is, 0 $\rightarrow$ 9, 1 $\rightarrow$ 8, etc. This is used % to provide ordering by descending year (latest year first). % \begin{macrocode} %<*seq-yrr&!seq-yr> FUNCTION {negate.year} { year empty$ { "99999" } { year #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ year #2 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ * year #3 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ * year #4 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ * } if$ } %</seq-yrr&!seq-yr> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`editor.sort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {editor.sort} { editor empty$ { key empty$ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" } { key sortify } if$ } { editor sort.format.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*seq-no> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { seq.num } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`init.seq'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {init.seq} { #0 'seq.num :=} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} EXECUTE {init.seq} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`int.to.fix'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {int.to.fix} { "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ * #-1 #10 substring$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</seq-no> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`presort'} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{seq-no} to author--year} % For unsorted author--year, make up the final sorting order in % \texttt{sort.label} with the original sequence number, for unsorting later. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {presort} { calc.label label sortify " " * %<*!seq-no> type$ "book" = type$ "inbook" = or 'author.editor.sort { type$ "proceedings" = 'editor.sort 'author.sort if$ } if$ #1 entry.max$ substring$ %</!seq-no> %<*seq-no> seq.num #1 + 'seq.num := seq.num int.to.fix %</seq-no> 'sort.label := sort.label * " " * %<seq-yr> " " * year field.or.null * %<seq-yrr&!seq-yr> " " * negate.year field.or.null * %<*!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> title field.or.null sort.format.title %</!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> %<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr> cite$ * #1 entry.max$ substring$ 'sort.key$ := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`author.organization.sort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} { author empty$ { organization empty$ { key empty$ { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" } { key sortify } if$ } { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } if$ } { author sort.format.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`editor.organization.sort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} { editor empty$ { organization empty$ { key empty$ { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" } { key sortify } if$ } { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } if$ } { editor sort.format.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`presort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {presort} %<*alph> { calc.label sort.label " " * type$ "book" = %</alph> %<!alph>{ type$ "book" = type$ "inbook" = or 'author.editor.sort { type$ "proceedings" = 'editor.organization.sort { type$ "manual" = 'author.organization.sort 'author.sort if$ } if$ } if$ %<alph> * " " * %<seq-yrr> negate.year field.or.null sortify %<!seq-yrr> year field.or.null sortify %<!(seq-yr|seq-yrr)|alph> * " " * %<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!alph> swap$ * title field.or.null sort.format.title * #1 entry.max$ substring$ 'sort.key$ := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} ITERATE {presort} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} SORT % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay|alph|!seq-no> % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection{`forward.pass'} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Include number of references in argument to % \texttt{thebibliography} environment} % With version~6.0 of \texttt{natbib}, the author-year styles can also be % used for numerical citations; then the \texttt{thebibliography} environment % must have an argument indicating the length of the longest label. % Simply count the references and add this number as the argument. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} STRINGS { last.label next.extra } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`initialize.extra.label.stuff'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} { #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := "" 'next.extra := #0 'last.extra.num := #0 'number.label := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {forward.pass} { last.label label = { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := } { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := "" 'extra.label := label 'last.label := } if$ number.label #1 + 'number.label := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`initialize.longest.label'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} { "" 'longest.label := #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := "" 'next.extra := #0 'longest.label.width := #0 'last.extra.num := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {forward.pass} { last.sort.label sort.label = { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := } { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := "" 'extra.label := sort.label 'last.sort.label := } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`reverse.pass'} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Put extra label in braces} % The extra label is added in braces so that natbib can treat it as one unit. % This allows extra labels to be more than one letter long. For non-NFSS % emphasizing, this is no problem, since labels go in |{\em a}|, but for % non-emphasizing and for NFSS, it caused troubles without the braces. % The trouble arises with multiple citations in one |\cite| in which % authors and years are the same, and only the extra label is given for % the next one. Note: |\emph{a}| is more than one letter long in this sense, % so it is not just a problem for more than 26 papers with same authors and % year. % % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 17}{Add \texttt{\char`\\natexlab}} % The command |\natexlab| now encloses the extra label for \texttt{natbib} % styles. This command normally just prints its argument, but for numerical % citation mode, it swallows its argument. This allows the extra labels to % be suppressed for numerical citations where they are superfluous. % The enclosing braces mentioned above must be included here to make the % entire extra label text a single token for \texttt{natbib}. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {reverse.pass} { next.extra "b" = { "a" 'extra.label := } 'skip$ if$ extra.label 'next.extra := extra.label %<xlab-it> emphasize %<*!html> duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * } if$ %</!html> 'extra.label := %<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|cn)> label extra.label * 'label := } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {reverse.pass} { next.extra "b" = { "a" 'extra.label := } 'skip$ if$ label extra.label * 'label := label width$ longest.label.width > { label 'longest.label := label width$ 'longest.label.width := } 'skip$ if$ extra.label 'next.extra := } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %<ay>EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} %<!ay&alph>EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay|alph> ITERATE {forward.pass} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} REVERSE {reverse.pass} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay|alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} { sort.label " " * %<seq-yrr> negate.year field.or.null sortify %<!seq-yrr> year field.or.null sortify %<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!(seq-lab|seq-key)> swap$ * " " * %<*!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> title field.or.null sort.format.title %</!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> %<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr> cite$ * #1 entry.max$ substring$ 'sort.key$ := %<har|cay|nmd|cn|ast> calc.short.label } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} ITERATE {bib.sort.order} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} SORT % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay&!alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} STRINGS { longest.label } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} { "" 'longest.label := #1 'number.label := #0 'longest.label.width := } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} %<*!cite> { number.label int.to.str$ 'label := number.label #1 + 'number.label := %</!cite> %<cite>{ cite$ 'label := label width$ longest.label.width > { label 'longest.label := label width$ 'longest.label.width := } 'skip$ if$ } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} ITERATE {longest.label.pass} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay&!alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`begin.bib'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{For \texttt{german}, add the definition of % {\tt\protect\bslash qq} to replace double-quote character.} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{For \texttt{babel}, read in file % \texttt{babelbst.tex} in \texttt{thebibliography} to define the word % commands.} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Add number of references as argument} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: provide default meanings for procedures used.} % The function \texttt{begin.bib} writes the initial text to the \texttt{.bbl} % file. The most important matter here is that the \texttt{thebibliography} % environment is invoked. % % Note: the French quotation marks are called `guillimets'; Adobe erroneously % named the symbols `guillimot', which is an arctic bird. The error has so % propagated, that it can no longer be corrected. \LaTeX\ took it over. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {begin.bib} %<*!html> %<*!ay&alph> { et.al.char.used { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ } 'skip$ if$ preamble$ empty$ %</!ay&alph> %<ay|!alph>{ preamble$ empty$ 'skip$ { preamble$ write$ newline$ } if$ %<ay> "\begin{thebibliography}{" number.label int.to.str$ * "}" * %<!ay> "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ %<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$ "\typeout{WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING}" write$ newline$ "\typeout{The bst file has been generated with inconsistent options}" write$ newline$ "\typeout{Read the warning message at the start of the bst file}" write$ newline$ "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$ %</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> %<*!plntx> %<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{`#1'}" %<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{``#1''}" %</!plntx> %<*plntx> %<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s> "\def\enquote#1{`#1'}" %<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g> "\def\enquote#1{``#1''}" %</plntx> %<*!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g> %<!plntx> "\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%" %<plntx> "\def\guillemotleft{%" write$ newline$ " \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}}" write$ newline$ %<!plntx> "\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%" %<plntx> "\def\guillemotright{%" write$ newline$ " \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}}" write$ newline$ %<!plntx> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}" %<plntx> "\def\enquote#1{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}" %</!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g> %<!tit-it&tit-qq> write$ newline$ %<umlaut> "\let\qq=\" quote$ * write$ newline$ %<em-ul> "\expandafter\ifx\csname uline\endcsname\relax\let\uline\underline\fi" %<em-ul> write$ newline$ %<*ay> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\natexlab}[1]{#1}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\def\natexlab#1{#1}\fi" write$ newline$ %<*har> "{\catcode`\|=0\catcode`\#=12\catcode`\@=11\catcode`\\=12" write$ newline$ "|immediate|write|@auxout{\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\gdef\natexlab#1{#1}\fi}}" write$ newline$ %</har> %</ay> %<*nmft&nmft-def> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibnamefont}[1]{#1}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibnamefont\endcsname\relax" %<plntx> write$ newline$ %<plntx> " \def\bibnamefont#1{#1}\fi" write$ newline$ %</nmft&nmft-def> %<*nmft&fnm-def> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibfnamefont}[1]{#1}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibfnamefont\endcsname\relax" %<plntx> write$ newline$ %<plntx> " \def\bibfnamefont#1{#1}\fi" write$ newline$ %</nmft&fnm-def> %<*lab&lab-def> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\citenamefont}[1]{#1}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname citenamefont\endcsname\relax" %<plntx> write$ newline$ %<plntx> " \def\citenamefont#1{#1}\fi" write$ newline$ %</lab&lab-def> %<*(url&!harnm)|eprint> %<*!plntx> %<nfss> "\providecommand{\url}[1]{\texttt{#1}}" %<!nfss> "\providecommand{\url}[1]{{\tt #1}}" write$ newline$ "\providecommand{\urlprefix}{URL }" write$ newline$ %</!plntx> %<*plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname url\endcsname\relax" write$ newline$ %<nfss> " \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}\fi" %<!nfss> " \def\url#1{{\tt #1}}\fi" write$ newline$ "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlprefix\endcsname\relax\def\urlprefix{URL }\fi" write$ newline$ %</plntx> %</(url&!harnm)|eprint> %<*doi> "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlstyle\endcsname\relax" write$ newline$ %<*!plntx> " \providecommand{\doi}[1]{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\else" write$ newline$ " \providecommand{\doi}{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi" write$ newline$ %</!plntx> %<*plntx> " \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax" write$ newline$ " \def\doi#1{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\fi \else" write$ newline$ " \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax" write$ newline$ " \def\doi{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi \fi" write$ newline$ %</plntx> %</doi> %<*lang> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\selectlanguage}[1]{\relax}" %<*plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname selectlanguage\endcsname\relax" write$ newline$ " \def\selectlanguage#1{}\fi" %</plntx> write$ newline$ %</lang> %<*!plntx> %<*babel> "\input{babelbst.tex}" write$ newline$ "\newcommand{\Capitalize}[1]{\uppercase{#1}}" write$ newline$ "\newcommand{\capitalize}[1]{\expandafter\Capitalize#1}" write$ newline$ %</babel> %<*annote> "\providecommand{\bibAnnoteFile}[1]{%" write$ newline$ " \IfFileExists{#1}{\begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\" write$ newline$ " \textsc{Annotation:}\ \input{#1}\end{quotation}}{}}" write$ newline$ "\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[2]{%" write$ newline$ " \begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\" write$ newline$ " \textsc{Annotation:}\ #2\end{quotation}}" write$ newline$ %</annote> %</!plntx> %<*bibinfo> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibinfo\endcsname\relax\def\bibinfo#1#2{#2}\fi" write$ newline$ %</bibinfo> %<*eprint> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\eprint}[2][]{\url{#2}}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname eprint\endcsname\relax\def\eprint#1{\url{#1}}\fi" write$ newline$ %</eprint> } %</!html> %<*html> { "<html><head><title>Bibliography Listing

%\iffalse THIS IS A META COMMENT -*- TeX -*- -*- DTX -*- % File: merlin.mbs %% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly % Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung % Max-Planck-Str. 2 % D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau % Germany % E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de % % This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either % version 1 of the License, or any later version. % % It is part of the custom-bib collection, % a contribution to the LaTeX2e system. %==================================================================== % Master Bibliography Style % for customizing bibliographic style files (.bst) % with the help of docstrip.tex % and the auxiliary program makebst.tex %-------------------------------------------------------------------- % (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below) %-------------------------------------------------------------------- % This file supports numerical and author-year citation styles % for natbib, harvard, astronom, authordate, apalike % It also supports languages other than English %-------------------------------------------------------------------- % This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it! % (Alternatively, extract documentation driver with option `driver') %==================================================================== % %<*!tail> % (The following notice appears in bst files generated from this file) % =============================================================== % IMPORTANT NOTICE: % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above. % % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either % version 1 of the License, or any later version. % =============================================================== % Name and version information of the main mbs file: %\fi % \ProvidesFile{merlin.mbs}[2007/04/24 4.20 (PWD, AO, DPC)] %\iffalse % %<*a&!a> % The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst % The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} ! \ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx % %<*driver> \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}% \usepackage{doc}% \raggedbottom \CodelineNumbered \RecordChanges % Comment out next line to print coding \OnlyDescription \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth} \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth} \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin} \begin{document} \DocInput{merlin.mbs} \end{document} % % END OF META COMMENT \fi % \CharacterTable % {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z % Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z % Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 % Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# % Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& % Acute accent \' Left paren $ Right paren $ % Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, % Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ % Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< % Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? % Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ % Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ % Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \CheckSum{516} % \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1} % \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} % \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm} % % \changes{1.0}{1993 Aug 16}{Initial version} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add multilingual capabilities} % \changes{2.1--2.5}{1995 May 2}{Changes to \texttt{babel.mbs} parallel 1.3--1.7 % in \texttt{genbst.mbs}} % \changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Change documentation to \LaTeXe} % \changes{1.3(2.1)a}{1994 Sep 1}{Alter wording of article title capitalization % choice} % \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Add full author name possibilities} % \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Fix up some punctuations} % \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Add possibility to put titles in quotes} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Accommodate new \texttt{harvard.sty}} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Add full names for \texttt{natbib} v5.3} % \changes{1.5(2.3)a}{1994 Oct 11}{Add option so year can contain any text} % \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Allow edited by to be in parentheses} % \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Allow (year) to have no punctuation % following} % \changes{1.5(2.3)c}{1995 Jan 20}{Journal volume numbers with more choice} % \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Date with no punctuation preceding it} % \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Editor names can be reversed like authors'} % \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Can abbreviate `edited by' to `ed(s).'} % \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Released version} % \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Add \texttt{seq-key} option} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Becomes \texttt{merlin.mbs}, with language % support in additional files} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Allow full author names to be reversed} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add \texttt{isbn} field option} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Citation names can be bold or small caps} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 8}{Colon and space may follow year} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Names can be reversed, dotless intials} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 17}{Volume, number can be followed by semi-colon} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Allow word editor or ed to be in parentheses} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Abbreviated journal names can have dots removed} % \changes{3.1}{1995 May 4}{Fix `edited by' so it is not abbreviated % automatically with `editor'} % \changes{3.1}{1995 May 6}{Re-do head/tail options to allow easy update of % older \texttt{.dbj} files} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Minimum number of authors can be up to 6, not 5} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Allow date as part of journal spec., for medical % journals} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Suppress `pages' and `pp'} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Allow date to be `1994 Jul', with or without dot} % \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 7}{Authors as Jones C.T.} % \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 16}{Sort without \emph{von} part} % \changes{3.2}{1995 Jul 31}{Release as version 3.2} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Extra labels put in braces so they are treated % as one unit by natbib} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Publisher's address can precede name} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Add full authors only if different from short list} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Add number of references as argument to % \texttt{thebibliography} environment} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Fix placement of \texttt{bolden} in % \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add possibility of date between volume and pages} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Word `and' can be in normal font in citations} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 4}{Tech Reports to have titles like books} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Delimit \texttt{\char`\\harvardyearright} properly} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Add option to sort by year (numerical only)} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 12}{Allow multiple journal-name files} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 16}{Allow months in dates even for author-year} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{Fix sorting bug for limited number of authors} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 30}{Add \texttt{named} format for author--year cites} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 2}{Blocks can be separated by semi-colons} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Journal names in normal font} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Volume subnumber added to pages} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 24}{Book pages in parentheses} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Put Jr at end for AGU author style} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Put `and' in same font in list and citation} % \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 30}{Allow `et al' to be in normal font} % \changes{3.6a}{1996 Feb 1}{Fix bugs with \texttt{xand} option} % \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 2}{Fix small caps with NFSS} % \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Fix clash of \texttt{emphasize} and % \texttt{purify\$}} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add \texttt{alpha}-type style} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 1}{Style alpha is never unsorted} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Allow blanks between blocks} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Publisher in parentheses} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 15}{Allow author-year to be sorted by year} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 16}{Cited `and' resets only one attribute} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Allow date to be between volume and number} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 17}{Add \texttt{\char`\\natexlab} for \texttt{natbib} 6.3} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Fix coding for adding `page' to journals} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add `volume' to journals} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Remove word `in'} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Place publisher before chapter/pages} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 25}{Allow period after date} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Commas between blocks, except for article titles % where period comes} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 12}{Allow comma before date} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Reorganize incollection organization and % publisher} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Allow edition to come before publisher} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Allow author--year to be in citation order} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Publisher, address, date can all be in % parentheses} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 18}{Remove extraneous hyphen before % \texttt{\char`\\getans}} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Allow pages at end before notes} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Fix bug with quoted titles when title missing} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Fix bug that put comma before publisher in % parentheses} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Allow AGU author style with full names} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Allow dash for repeated authors, periods % before notes} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Apr 25}{Change case of first note word if mid-sentence} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Option to break long page numbers} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Option for titles in guillemets} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Option to use underlining for emphasis} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Reorganize options for year in journal spec} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Multiple options in menu} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 10}{Fonts for names: can exclude first names, % use-defined font allowed, improved coding for `and' and `et~al.'} % \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Use \texttt{format.date} consistently in place % of \texttt{year} alone} % \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Suppress ISBN number when certain crossrefs % are present} % \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Add option for comma between year and pages} % \changes{3.86}{1998 Apr 20}{Bug with minimum 6 authors corrected} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{url} field for all styles} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Suppress months in numerical mode} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Author limitation now 99} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{annote} field and annotation} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{issn} field} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Correct spelling of `guillimet'} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Make \textsl{et~al.} a variable \texttt{bbl.etal}} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{language} field} % \changes{3.87h}{1998 Oct 16}{Add html output possibilities} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress edition conversion in English} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Conf. booktitles are upright if book titles are} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Various extra options for book pages, % inproceedings, mainly for MPG Jahrbuch} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Jan 13}{For html, newblock just adds period, no new line} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 1}{Do edition suppression properly} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 26}{Fix font handling of names} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 26}{Test for multipages for word `page(s)' in journals} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Missing years may be left blank, not just ????} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{When key replaces author, leave year blank} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 Jul 20}{AO: %Arthur Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) % Add new entries: collaboration, eid, eprint, numpages, per option % \texttt{revdata}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 Jul 20}{AO: Add reference component tags (\texttt{bibinfo} % and friends)} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Sept 17}{PWD: incorporate AO's changes with moderations} % \changes{4.00}{2000 Jan 21}{PWD: add \texttt{archive} field} % \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{PWD: Fix improper \texttt{change.case\$} and % \texttt{bibinfo.check} ordering} % \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Fix bug with `in' with articles} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add \texttt{seq-yrr} for reversed year ordering} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add \texttt{thtit-x} to suppress thesis titles} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add line to define \texttt{natexlab} in aux file for harvard} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: bug fix when both \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-jnl} given} % \changes{4.04}{2002 Sep 13}{PWD: add support for Slovene/Slovenian language} % \changes{4.05}{2002 Oct 21}{PWD: bug fix in \texttt{inproceedings} with % \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-beg}} % \changes{4.06}{2003 Apr 2}{PWD: add \texttt{nmd-2} and \texttt{nmd-3} for use with \texttt{nmdash}} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{PWD: add DOI} % \changes{4.10}{2003 June 3}{PWD: use \texttt{\protect\bslash providecommand} % instead of \TeX\ commands, but provide \texttt{noprov} option to undo it.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 June 3}{PWD: make \texttt{eid} available not just for Rev\TeX} % \changes{4.10}{2003 June 11}{PWD: add \texttt{pg-pre} for total book pages location} % \changes{4.11}{2003 June 23}{PWD: fix DOI to have no space after colon} % \changes{4.11}{2003 June 23}{PWD: add options \texttt{ser-vol} and \texttt{ser-ed}} % \changes{4.11a}{2003 Aug 19}{PWD: fix bug with \texttt{ser-ed} option} % \changes{4.12}{2003 Sep 8}{PWD: rename \texttt{noprov} to \texttt{plntx} for Plain \TeX\ compatibility} % \changes{4.12a}{2003 Nov 6}{PWD: fix bug in which comma separators go on wrong side; change was % originally made in \texttt{makebst} but not in \texttt{merlin}} % \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: fix some bugs in \texttt{inbook} and \texttt{incollection}} % \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: add option \texttt{nm-rvcx}} % \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: add option \texttt{tit-col} for colon after titles} % \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{PWD: add option \texttt{nm-rvvc}, spaceless initials with comma} % \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{PWD: add option \texttt{etal-xc} to suppress comma before et al.} % \changes{4.15}{2006 Jan 4}{PWD: add option \texttt{pres} for conference talks, presentations} % \changes{4.16}{2006 Feb 15}{PWD: fix bug in \texttt{proceedings} that suppress number/series at times} % \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{PWD: add option to allow more than one author in cites before et al.} % \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 24}{PWD: allow variable number of authors before truncating citation} % % \pagestyle{myheadings} % \markboth{P. W. Daly}{A General Master Bibliography Style} % % \title{{\bfseries A Master Bibliographic Style File}\\ % for numerical, author--year, multilingual applications} % % \author{Patrick W. Daly} % % \GetFileInfo{merlin.mbs} % \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\ % version \fileversion{} from \filedate % \thanks{Work on \texttt{custom-bib}~4.00 was supported by the % American Physical Society}} % % \maketitle % % \MakeShortVerb{\|} % % \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt % % \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX} % \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}} % % \section{Introduction} % A problem facing users of \btx{} is that there is no standard for % formatting lists of references. Publishers and journals insist % on completely arbitrary placement of commas, colons, and ordering of % entries. Furthermore, author--year styles of citations are supported by % certain special \LaTeX{} packages, but each for only a very limited % number of bibliographic styles. Finally, most such style files are for % English only, and any adaptations to other languages must duplicate the % entire spectrum of such files. % % All of these obstacles are in principle easily overcome by simply % reprogramming \btx{} by means of an appropriate \emph{bibliographic style % file} (extension \texttt{.bst}). \btx{} is in fact extremely flexible; % unfortunately its programming language is very low-level, permitting only % the most basic of hacks for the normal user. % % The solution to this is a \emph{generic} or \emph{master bibliographic % style file} (extension \texttt{.mbs}) containing \dtx{} options for % alternative coding. By selecting the desired options, one can customize a % \texttt{.bst} file to one's needs. % % This file, \texttt{\filename}, is my latest version of a general-purpose % \texttt{.mbs} file to meet as many bibliographic needs as possible. % It was originally assembled from Oren Patashnik's standard files {\tt % plain.bst} and \texttt{unsrt.bst}, plus his non-standard file {\tt % apalike.bst}, a very basic author--year citation style. % It has since evolved extensively as I have added features found in % available \texttt{.bst} files, and those demanded by publishers or % suggested to me by many user/contributors. % % To produce a customized bibliographic style (\texttt{.bst}) file from this % master file, simply \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} the `program' \texttt{makebst.tex}. % When asked for the name of the master file, answer with % \begin{quote}\tt\filename\end{quote} % and then reply to the questions in the following menus. The last question % is whether you want to generate the \texttt{.bst} file right away. % % More details on this process and on the options available are to be found % in the rest of this article. % % \section{History of this File} % % Since the first release of this generic file, in November 1993, under the % name \texttt{genbst.mbs}, I have received innumerable % suggestions for additions, most of which I have tried to include. Often % this has resulted in reorganizing the coding, and adding new functions. % The resulting \texttt{.bst} files are now quite different from those of % Patashnik, although the underlying ideas are the same. % % A second version was released shortly afterwards that paralleled the first % one except that it included support for languages other than English. % That file was named \texttt{babel.mbs}, following the \texttt{babel} % system of Johannes Braams. Although I always viewed it as version 2 of % \texttt{genbst.mbs}, all additions to the one were also included in the % other. This of course was tedious and prone to error. I looked forward to % the day when \texttt{babel.mbs} would become the only supported version. % The reason I was reluctant to do that before was that the overhead per % language was fairly high, and I dreaded to think how large the file would % become when 20 or 30 languages were added. % % I then found a way to put the language definitions into separate files, % one per language. This means that new languages do not burden the basic % file, and that users need only keep those support files that might % interest him or her. New ones may also be made up locally by hacking an % existing language definition file. (The file \texttt{english.mbs} is % supplied only for this purpose.) % % For this reason, \texttt{\filename} was released as version~3 of % \texttt{genbst.mbs} and \texttt{babel.mbs}. In spite of the new name, it % should be regarded as their direct successor. Needless to say, this means % that the earlier two \texttt{.mbs} files will no longer be maintained. % % To include language support, all explicit English words like % \textsl{editor} and \textsl{chapter} have been replaced by functions % whose definitions may be altered in the resulting \texttt{.bst} file % (less desirable method) or which may be redefined by an external % language definition file (preferred method). Alternatively, one can select % the pseudo-language named \texttt{babel} which inserts \LaTeX{} commands % for the explicit words, the definitions of which must be % contained in a file called {\tt babelbst.tex}. Only the languages English % and \texttt{babel} are included internally to \texttt{\filename}; all % others are contained in external language definition files. % % Another new feature is the possibility of including a file containing % prestored shorthand designations for certain journal names. Such a file % is provided for physics journals, but others could be made up using this % one as a model. See Section~\ref{sec:jnames}. % % To take advantage of these external files, one must use % \texttt{makebst} version~3; \texttt{\filename} may still be used with % earlier versions, but without the external files. % % Version~4 arose out of a project by David Carlisle who created a variant % of \texttt{\filename} for REV\TeX\ and the American Physical Society with % the help of Mark Doyle of the APS. The main purpose was to add extra % fields (see page~\pageref{sec:revtex}) that were needed. Subsequently % Arthur Ogawa revised the code considerably, making it more rational, % fixing some bugs and adding some extra features. % % I was then asked to incorporate all these changes into the official % version of \texttt{\filename}. This required much debugging, since the % Ogawa's rationalization upset several of the delicate interplays between % various options. The result is version~4.0, the work on which has been % supported by the American Physical Society. % % Version~4.0 contains the REV\TeX\ extra fields and the % Carlisle-Doyle-Ogawa rewrites. An additional feature that derived from % Carlisle's work on REV\TeX\ is the tagging of the text entries in the % bibliography. This means the volume number is given as % |\bibinfo{volume}{5}|. Normally only the number 5 is printed, but another % program could use this to reconstruct the original database entries. % % Arthur Ogawa also added some features to \texttt{makebst} to provide a more % verbose protocol. As a result, version~4 of \texttt{\filename} can only be % used with version~4 of \texttt{makebst}. Older versions of \texttt{\filename} % will still function with the newer \texttt{makebst}. Also, \texttt{.dbj} % files created with older versions should still produce the same results with % \texttt{\filename}~4. % % \def\temp{merlin.mbs}\ifx\temp\filename % This file is now named after the legendary magician in the hope that it % can produce wonders by incanting the right magic formulas. However, one % should bear in mind that even Merlin was not omnipotent. It would be too % much to hope that all bibliographic wishes will be fulfilled quickly and % easily, but we shall try as best we can. Watch the wizardry at work! % \fi % % \section{About Master Bibliographic Style Files} % % For details about how master bibliography style files are to be % constructed, see the documentation on \texttt{makebst}. Here only a % rough overview is given. % % \subsection{The \dtx{} Program} % The \dtx{} program, written by Frank Mittelbach, is now a fundamental % part of the \LaTeXe{} installation. Its original purpose is to remove % comment lines from documented files, but has the secondary function of % selecting alternative lines of coding. % % A master \btx{} bibliographic style file is one that, when processed by % \dtx{} with selected options, produces a regular \btx{} \texttt{.bst} % file with the desired features. % % In this sense, \dtx{} functions something like a C preprocessor. In fact, % Oren Patashnik's original \texttt{.bst} files were all produced from a single % source file by means of the preprocessor. The advantage of \dtx{} is that % it is portable to all installations with \TeX. % % \subsection{The \dtx{} Batch Job} % % The \dtx{} program can be run either interactively, where the user must % answer questions via the keyboard, or by means of a batch job where all % the inputs are prepared in a file beforehand. For producing a \btx{} % style file from a master file, the batch job method is the only feasible % one, simply because of the large number of options available. (There is % another reason for employing a batch job: the interactive method adds an % |\endinput| command at the end, something that \btx{} will protest % about.) % % The batch job files in general do not have any particular extension but I % use \texttt{.dbj} for \emph{\dtx{} batch job}. These files are useful % because they document the options used to produce the \texttt{.bst} file, % and they may be edited to experiment with alternative options. % % \subsection{The \texttt{makebst} Program} % % It is possible to make up a batch job file by hand using the option % information listed in Section~\ref{sec:options}, but my accompanying % program \texttt{makebst} simplifies the task considerably. It reads menu % information in the master file itself in order to present the user with % an interactive list of choices, translating the answers into appropriate % options that are then written to a batch job file. % % To run it, simply process \texttt{makebst.tex} with \TeX\ or \LaTeX, and % answer the questions. The first of these is whether you want some % instructions or not, and the second is the name of the \texttt{.mbs} that % you want to use. The next query is about the name of the desired % \texttt{.bst} file (which will also be the root name of the batch job). % After that, all further questions come from menu information in the % master file. % % At the very end, \texttt{makebst} asks if it should run the batch job for % you. Isn't that a fine service? % % \section{Multilingual Adaptation} % The original \texttt{.bst} files from Oren Patashnik contain explicit % English words that are output into the final text. Since \LaTeX{} is % increasingly being used for other languages, and since the official % version since December 1991 also uses macros in place of explicit words, % it seems appropriate for \btx{} to follow suit. % % In this master bibliographic style file {\tt\filename}, all explicit % words have been replaced by functions: e.g., the word \textsl{editor} has % become the function \texttt{bbl.editor}. Depending on the language option % chosen, this function is defined to be the text {\tt"editor"}, % {\tt"Redakteur"}, or {\tt"redacteur"}, for English, German, and French, % respectively. % % There is another special `language' called \texttt{babel} that instead inserts % the text |"\bbleditor{}"|; the definitions of these \LaTeX{} commands % must be in a separate file named \texttt{babelbst.tex} that is read in at % the start of the bibliography. % % Only English and \texttt{babel} are supported directly in % \texttt{\filename}; all other language definitions are contained in % separate definition files, e.g., \texttt{french.mbs}, \texttt{german.mbs}. % % The language selection is made during the \texttt{makebst} run, which % asks for the name of the language definition file as the first menu item. If % either English or \texttt{babel} is wanted, reply with the default, which % is \texttt{\filename} itself; otherwise give the name of the desired % language file. % % \begin{quote}\slshape % \textbf{Note:} the language definition files can only be used with % \texttt{makebst} version~3 or later, and % % with an external definition file, the \dtx{} run requires two passes % through \texttt{\filename}, doubling the processing time. % \end{quote} % % Apart from the language adaptation of the whole bibliography, there is also % the possibility of switching languages for individual references, so as to % hyphenate the title properly. This is done with the \texttt{language} field % and the \verb!\setlanguage! command. % % \subsection{Adding a New Language Definition File} % % To create a new language definition file, simply take one of the existing % ones, like \texttt{english.mbs}, and replace the explicit English words % with their translations. There are, however, a number of points that can % complicate this procedure. % % \begin{enumerate} % \item % Do not forget to change the documentation in the file, especially % version number, date, author. % % \item % There are option menus that need to be translated too. It might also be % desirable to add or remove options. In most cases, the options in the % language files involve possible abbreviations, like % \begin{quote} % \verb!\mes{^^JABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':}!\\ % \verb!\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}!\\ % \verb!\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}!\\ % \verb!\getans! % \end{quote} % % In this example, the option \texttt{pp} appears later in the definition % \begin{quote} % \verb!FUNCTION {bbl.pages}!\\ % \verb+%{ "pages" }+\\ % \verb!%{ "pp." }! % \end{quote} % This a \emph{local} option, that only affects the coding in the definition % file. It is possible to add more local options. % % \item % However, all options, whether activated by the main file or by the % definition file, apply to both. In other words, there really is no such % thing as a local option. In the above example, \texttt{pp} is only % local because it is never used in \texttt{\filename}. % % \item % Add the name of the language as an option, with % \begin{quote} % \verb!\mes{^^JOptions for ENGLISH}!\\ % \verb!\wr{\spsp\spsp english,\pc: English language}! % \end{quote} % (This is how options are added without |\optdef| and |\getans|.) The % main file just might recognize it in order to take some % language-specific action. The least it should do is add a comment at % the start of the \texttt{.bst} file stating for which language it is to % be used. % % \item % There could be some problems with edition numbers due to language % dependent ways of treating ordinal numbers (1st, 2nd, 3rd in English; % 1$^{\mbox{\scriptsize re}}$, 2$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$, % 3$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$ in French; 1., 2., 3., in German). Some % accommodation already exists for the oddball language English, and % further hacking may be needed for others. % % \item % If there should be any need for a double-quote character in % the translations (German needs it for umlauts) then there is trouble % because the \btx{} strings do not allow it. Instead, use the command % |\qq|, as in the German word |F\qq{u}nfte| for {\sl F\"unfte} (fifth). % It is then vital to add the option \texttt{umlaut} with % \begin{quote} % \verb!\wr{\spsp\spsp umlaut,\pc: Activate umlaut command}! % \end{quote} % % Bernd Raichle points out that |\^^b| can be used in place of |\"| % within \btx{} code. One can thus replace |F\qq{u}nfte| with |F\^^b unfte| % and do away with the \texttt{umlaut} option. % % \end{enumerate} % % \subsection{Changing \texttt{babelbst.tex} for a New Language} % % Alternatively, a new language can be added by % modifying the file \texttt{babelbst.tex} and selecting the language {\tt % babel} for the \texttt{.bst} file. If this is the only language to be used, % then just change the English words in the definitions. % % However, some form of switching would be more desirable. With \TeX\ % version 3, there is a |\language| parameter to control the hyphenation % patterns, and this could be used to select the correct language. For % example, if language 0 is English and language 1 German, then put the % English version of \texttt{babelbst.tex} into \texttt{englbst.tex} and the % German % version in \texttt{germbst.tex}. Then \texttt{babelbst.tex} could contain: % \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim} % \ifcase\language \input{englbst} \or \input{germbst} % \else \input{englbst} \fi % \end{verbatim} % \end{quote} % % This is of course installation dependent. % % \subsection{Extracting the Sample \texttt{babelbst.tex} File} % % A sample \texttt{babelbst.tex} (for English) is contained in this master % file. Extract it with \dtx{} and the option \texttt{bblbst}. It may be % edited (and possibly renamed) for other languages as needed. % % \subsection{Problem with Edition Numbers} % Something to note here is the ordinal numbers for editions. \btx{} % demands that the field \texttt{edition} be given in the database as a word % \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc., or as \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd}, % etc. This is bad policy % because it is language dependent. So what I do is to test for the words % \textsl{first} through \textsl{fifth} (case independently) and replace them % with language-dependent equivalents. If the {\tt} option is selected, % these equivalents are ordinal numbers for that language. Any other words % cannot be interpreted and must be printed as is. % % However, if the \texttt{edition} is given as a number, with or without % following letters, then the numbers 1 through 5 are replaced by their % words; any higher numbers just have the ordinal ending (\textsl{th} % in English) added to them. % % These numbers are only used with the word \textsl{edition} or % its equivalent in other languages, so the translators need % to provide only the one gender, e.g., feminine for both German and % French. % % % \section{Prestoring Names of Journals}\label{sec:jnames} % % The standard \texttt{.bst} files contain the names of some 20 journals % in the field of computing, stored as macros for easy reference within the % database \texttt{.bib} files. For example, the \textsl{Journal of % Computer and System Sciences} can be referred to as \texttt{jcss}. % With the option \texttt{jabr} (for journal abbreviation) this same % shorthand produces \textsl{J.~Comput. Syst. Sci.}. % % Some \texttt{.bst} files for physics journals include additional journal % names, and it is conceivable that other faculties might wish to prepare % their own such lists, with each name present in a full or abbreviated % form. Such an external file can now be added with \texttt{\filename} and % \texttt{makebst} version~3. % % As a model, I supply a file \texttt{physjour.mbs} with the names of % physics journals which I have taken from other \texttt{.bst} files. % I also have a file \texttt{geojour.mbs} with the names of geophysics % journals, and a contributed file \texttt{photjour.mbs} containing names of % optics journals. % % In fact, version~3.5 can even include multiple journal-name files. % Thus one can decide whether to include both, one, or none of the above % files. % % \section{HTML Output} % There is an option \texttt{html} to create a \texttt{.bst} file producing % hypertext (HTML) output instead of the regular \LaTeX\ code. This is still % experimental. The resulting \btx\ output will still be a file with extension % \texttt{.bbl} and will contain the \LaTeX\ special characters, like |\"a| for % \"a. One must go over the output to convert such characters to the HTML % equivalents, and to remove curly braces. Only then can it be renamed % \texttt{.html}. % % Three possible lists are offered: % \begin{itemize} % \item a simple paragraph for each entry, % \item a numbered list, % \item a description list with the key as the label. % \end{itemize} % % \section{Updating Older \texttt{.dbj} Files}\label{sec:update} % If you have existing \texttt{.dbj} files for generating \texttt{.bst} % files from the older version \texttt{genbst.mbs}, these may be run with % \texttt{\filename} by simply changing the name of the source % \texttt{.mbs} file. For example, where the older \texttt{.dbj} file contains % the line % \begin{quote} % |\generateFile{mystyle.bst}{f}{\from{genbst.mbs}{%| % \end{quote} % edit the file so that \texttt{genbst.mbs} is replaced by % \texttt{\filename}. The resulting \texttt{mystyle.bst} file will then be % an updated version of the older one, containing all the same features. % % Version~4 of \texttt{\filename} can only be used with version~4 of % \texttt{makebst}, whereas older versions of \texttt{\filename} will still % function with the newer \texttt{makebst}. Also, \texttt{.dbj} files created % with older versions should still produce the same results with % \texttt{\filename}~4, albeit with different coding. % % \section{Acknowledgements} % I wish to thank all the people who have taken the trouble to send me % suggestions or special requests. Admittedly, it has been out of % self-interest on their part, since they had bibliographic needs to be % met. And I have often questioned the need for many of their demands. Yet, % that is part of the bibliographic jungle that I am trying to eliminate. % If I thought that bibliographies were arbitrarily formatted before I % started this project, I have more than sufficient confirmation since % then. The fault lies not with the poor contributors, but with the % publishers who cannot agree on a decent standard. % % I want to thank Frank Mittelbach, not only for creating \dtx{} % in the first place, but also for sending me his bibliographic requirements, % and for suggesting an improvement to \texttt{makebst}. % % David Carlisle has added the REV\TeX\ fields and |\bibinfo| tagging in a % special variant of \texttt{\filename}; Arthur Ogawa then incorporated % them into the main file, and overhauled much of the coding to make it % more legible and rational. % % I especially wish to thank Mark Doyle and the American Physical % Society for supporting the work on \texttt{custom-bib}~4.0. % % And finally, all of us must thank Oren Patashnik for providing \btx; % without its flexibility and programmability (in spite of the complexity % of the language) the master bibliographic styles would not be possible at % all. % % \section{The Options}\label{sec:options} % Here I present a list of all the \dtx{} options that are % available in this file {\tt\filename}. % The normal user can skip this section since he will probably make use % of the menus via \texttt{makebst}. These are described in % Section~\ref{sec:menu}. The menus provide much more informative prompts % than the heavily abbreviated option names listed here. In other words, % the options described in this section are meant for internal (programmer) % usage, while the normal interface for the user is the menus. % % I have tried to avoid % conflicts with mutually exclusive options by always letting one dominate if % more than one has been specified. Such options have the same prefix, such % as \texttt{nm-rev} and \texttt{nm-init}. % If one uses \texttt{makebst} to produce the % \dtx{} batch job, then it is impossible to give mutually % exclusive options unless one edits the batch file oneself afterwards. % (Anything is possible with computer freaks!) % % Most mutually exclusive options have the same prefix before the hyphen. % % \newenvironment{opt}{% % \begin{list}{}{\labelwidth2cm \leftmargin2.5cm \labelsep1em \rightmargin0pt % \def\makelabel##1{\ttfamily##1 \hfill}}}{\end{list}} % \textbf{Citation style:} whether or not a numerical or author--year system % is to be used. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is numerical, standard \LaTeX, as for {\tt % plain.bst}.\\ % |\bibitem{key}...| % \item[cite] special for listing entire databases; the cite key is used % as the label so it may be listed.\\ % |\bibitem[key]{key}...| % \item[ay] for author--year style of citations. Various forms of |\bibitem| % are provided under this option, to support different types % of \LaTeX{} styles for interfacing with the author--year system. % \item[alph] for \texttt{alpha.bst} style of citations; essentially numerical % but an abbreviation of the author names plus year is used as % the label. First three letters of single author, or first letters % of first three authors. % \item[alf-1] with \texttt{alph}, uses first three letters of first author's % name, regardless of how many authors. % \item[alf-f] with \texttt{alph}, uses first author's whole name. % \end{opt} % % For numerical style, one can select the HTML option, to output a % hypertext file instead of a \LaTeX\ one. % % \begin{opt} % \item[--] normal \LaTeX\ output; % \item[html] for HTML output, one reference per paragraph % \item[htlist] (with \texttt{html}) outputs to a numbered list; % \item[htdes] (with \texttt{html}) outputs description list, with the key. % \end{opt} % % If \texttt{ay} has been selected, then the type of author--year interface % is selectable. Some of these, like \texttt{natbib} and \texttt{harvard} % exist in two versions because of updates in these systems. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is the system I invented for my \texttt{natbib.sty}.\\ % |\bibitem[author(year)]{key}...| % \item[nat] for extended format of \texttt{natbib.sty} version 5.3\\ % |\bibitem[author(year)full author]{key}...| % \item[alk] for the \texttt{apalike.sty} of Oren Patashnik and related % systems\\ % |\bibitem[author, year]{key}...| % \item[har] for the Harvard family of styles (with \texttt{harvard.sty}).\\ % |\harvarditem[short]{long}{year}{key}...| % \item[harnm] for the extended Harvard family, containing some extra commands % used by \LaTeXe\ version 2.0.3 of \texttt{harvard.sty} % \item[ast] for astronomy family of styles (with \texttt{astron.sty}).\\ % |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{author}{year}]{key}...| % \item[cay] for the Chicago family of styles (with \texttt{chicago.sty}).\\ % |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{long}{short}{year}]{key}...| % \item[nmd] for the `named' variant of Chicago (with \texttt{named.sty}).\\ % |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{author}{year}]{key}...| % \item[cn] for the ``author--date'' group of styles (with {\tt % authordate1-4.sty})\\ % |\bibitem[\protect\citename{author, }year]{key}...| % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Sequence:} the order in which the references are listed. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is alphabetical by all authors, date, title % \item[seq-yr] order by year (ascending), authors, title % \item[seq-yrr] order by year (descending), authors, title % \item[seq-no] sequence by citation order % \item[seq-lab] (author--year) by label, date, title (means that Daly % precedes Daly and Williams, precedes Daly et al.) % \item[seq-key] (author--year) like \texttt{seq-lab} except that for % identical authors and year, the cite keyword is used % instead of the title % \item[vonx] ignore \emph{von} part of name when ordering (default is % to consider \emph{von} as part of the whole surname) % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Language selection:} the translations of certain explicit words. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is English, for \textsl{and}, \textsl{chapter}, % \textsl{editor}, etc.; % \item[babel] replace words with \LaTeX{} commands that are defined % in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}; % \item[lang] adds the \texttt{language} field for switching language % for one reference only by means of the \verb!\setlanguage! % command in \texttt{babel}. % \end{opt} % % If one of the external language definition files is used, then the name of % its language should be in the list of active options. Many other language % names are already included as options in this main file simply for the % purpose of adding a comment at the start of the \texttt{.bst} file. % % The \texttt{language} field is intended to allow the hyphenation patterns % to be switched temporarily so that titles can be set in the original % language. % % \textbf{Annotation:} % annotations are added either by means of the \texttt{annote} field, or % with a \texttt{.tex} file of the same name as the citation key. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] no annotations % \item[annote] annotations enabled, with \texttt{annote} field. % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Presentations:} % add a non-standard type to handle talks (presentations). This is similar to the % \texttt{inproceedings} but without \texttt{booktitle} and with the presenting % author in bold face. This author is specified by the \texttt{key} entry, which % is that author's position in the author list (1, 2, \dots). The type of presentation % (oral or poster) is specified by the entry \texttt{type}. The date without year is given % in \texttt{month}, which must be present. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] no presentations % \item[pres] include a \texttt{presentation} type % \item[pres-bf] (with \texttt{pres}) to put speaker in bold face % \item[pres-it] (with \texttt{pres}) to put speaker in italics % \item[pres-sc] (with \texttt{pres}) to put speaker in small caps % \end{opt} % Without any of the extra font options, the speaker's name is not highlighted. % % \textbf{Missing names:} % If the author and/or editor is missing, the standard \texttt{.bst} files % use the \texttt{key} field in place of the names for purposes of ordering the % entries. % % For author--year styles, the \texttt{key} field is even inserted in the % reference list and in the label in place of the authors. Optionally, one can % suppress the year in this case, which causes \texttt{natbib} (version~7) % to print only that key text as a code designation for the work. % % \begin{opt} % \item[--] year is inserted in the labels when \texttt{key} replaces authors % \item[keyxyr] year is left blank in this case % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Names formatting:} how initials and surnames are to be combined. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is full names, given names first % \item[nm-revf] full names, surname first % \item[nm-init] initials plus surname % \item[nm-rev] surname plus initials % \item[nm-rev1] surname plus initials (1st name only) then initials % plus surname % \item[nm-revv1] same as \texttt{nm-rev1} but with full names % \item[nm-rv] as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without dots % \item[nm-rvvc] as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without spaces % \item[nm-rvv] as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without spaces or comma % \item[nm-rvx] as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without dots or spaces % \item[nm-rvcx] as \texttt{nm-rvx}, but with comma after surname % \item[ed-rev] editors' names in collections are reversed the same as authors' % \item[ed-au] editors are formatted with same routine as authors; this % is an alias for \texttt{ed-rev}, which is kept only for % compatibility % \item[aunm-semi] a semi-colon is placed between author names instead of % a comma % \item[aunm-sl] a slash is placed between author names instead of a comma % \item[nmdash] repeated author/editor names replaced by dash % \item[nmd-2] with \texttt{nmdash}, uses 2 em dashes % \item[nmd-3] with \texttt{nmdash}, uses 3 em dashes % \item[jnrlab] include the junior part of name in citations (normally % appears only in reference listing) % \item[jnrlst] with one of the \texttt{nm-rev} type options, puts the % junior part last, after the (reversed) first name % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Number of names in bibliography:} normally all names listed (in reference list) % \begin{opt} % \item[nmlm] limit number of names % \item[x1...x90] (with \texttt{nmlm}) maximum number of names to appear; % for over 9, give the tens and units separately, as % \texttt{x20,x5} for 25 % \item[m1...m90] (with \texttt{nmlm}) minimum number before \textsl{et al.} % written; % no check for consistency is taken; one \texttt{x} and % one \texttt{m} number must be given, and {\tt x}$\le${\tt m} % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Number of names in citation:} before \textsl{et al.} % % The default is to cite one or two names at most, but for three or more, to % cite only one name with \textsl{et~ al.} % \begin{opt} % \item[mcite] to change the default % \item[mct-1...mct-5] (with \texttt{mcite}) number of names preceding \textsl{et~al.} % \item[mct-x2...mct-x5] (with \texttt{mcite}) max number of authors without truncating % \end{opt} % The default is equivalent to \texttt{mct-1} and \texttt{mct-x2}. % % \textbf{Names font:} in the reference list % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is names in normal typeface % \item[nmft] names are in some special font % \item[nmfted] editors' names in collections also get special fonts % \item[nmft-sc] names in small caps % \item[nmft-it] names in italics % \item[nmft-bf] names in bold % \item[nmft-def] names in user defined font |\bibnamefont{}|. % \item[nmand-rm] `and' in normal font, not same as authors'. % \item[fnm-rm] (with \texttt{nmft}) first names are in regular font % \item[fnm-def] (with \texttt{nmft}) first names are in user defined % font |\bibfnamefont{}|. % \item[--] first names are in same font as the surnames. % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Citation font:} what is written by the |\cite| command % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is no special font % \item[lab-it] cited names in italics % \item[lab-sc] cited names in small caps % \item[lab-bf] cited names in bold face % \item[lab-def] cited names in user defined font |\bibnamefont{}|. % \item[and-rm] word `and' in cited names in normal font % \item[xlab-it] extra label (letter after year) in italics % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Block punctuation:} between logical sections (not mutually % exclusive) % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is period after each logical section, including end % \item[blk-com] use commas, except at very end (changes \textsl{In} to % \textsl{in}) % \item[blk-tit] like \texttt{blk-com} except period follows titles of % articles and books % \item[blk-tita] like \texttt{blk-com} except period follows article title % \item[tit-col] with \texttt{blk-tit} or \texttt{blk-tita}, for colon instead of period % \item[com-semi] with \texttt{blk-com}, uses semi-colon instead of comma % \item[com-blank] with \texttt{blk-com}, uses blanks instead of comma % \item[in-col] puts a colon after \textsl{In} or \textsl{in} for edited works % \item[in-it] puts word \textsl{in} in italics (may be used with % \texttt{in-col}) % \item[in-x] suppresses the word \textsl{in} for edited works % \item[fin-bare] no punctuation at the very end % \item[au-col] puts a colon after the author/editor block % \item[blknt] puts period before note % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Date:} if missing % % \begin{opt} % \item[--] Missing date replaced by ???? (author--year) % \item[blkyear] Missing date left blank, even in label. % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Date:} position and enclosure % % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is date at end, before notes; for author--year, % date consists only of year, no month % \item[dt-jnl] date at end as for default, except for journal articles % where it follows the journal name as part of specification % \item[dt-end] date goes after any notes % \item[dt-beg] date goes after authors' names % \item[yr-par] date in parentheses () % \item[yr-brk] date in brackets [] % \item[yr-com] date preceded by comma and space % \item[yr-col] date preceded by colon and space % \item[yr-per] date preceded by period and space % \item[yr-blk] date preceded by space % \item[dtrev] date as year month instead of month year % \item[dtbf] date bold face % \item[aymth] include month even for author-year % \item[xmth] suppress month for numerical mode % \item[yrp-x] suppresses punctuation following month, year when date % is just after authors % \item[yrp-col] adds colon and space after date when just after authors % \item[yrp-semi] adds semi-colon and space after date when just after authors % \item[yrp-per] adds period and space after date % \item[yrpp-xsp] removes blank following year punctuation % \item[note-yr] permits text (like ``in press'') in the \texttt{year} field % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Article in journal:} style of title, volume, pages % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is: Title. \textit{Journal}, vol(num):p1--p2 % \item[injnl] adds word \textsl{in} before journal name, same style as % for incollections % \item[volp-sp] as above, but with a space, vol(num):~p1--p2 % \item[volp-semi] semi-colon instead of colon: vol(num);~p1--p2 % \item[volp-com] comma and space instead of colon: vol(num),~p1--p2 % \item[volp-blk] only space instead of colon: vol(num)~p1--p2 % \item[vol-bf] volume in bold % \item[vol-it] volume in italics % \item[vol-2bf] volume and number bold % \item[vnum-x] no number for journals, only volume % \item[vnum-sp] space between, as vol (num) % \item[vnum-cm] replace vol(num) with vol, num % \item[vnum-nr] replace vol(num) with vol, no. num % \item[vnum-h] replace vol(num) with vol, \#num % \item[vnum-b] replace vol(num) with vol num % \item[jdt-v] year in parentheses attached to volume: vol(year) num % \item[jdt-vs] as above, with space: vol (year) num % \item[jdt-p] year precedes pages: vol(num), (year) p1--p2 % \item[jdt-pc] as above, with comma: vol(num), (year), p1--p2 % \item[jpg-1] only starting page given % \item[pgsep-c] page numbers over 10,000 have comma % \item[pgsep-s] page numbers over 10\,000 have space % \item[pgsep-p] page numbers over 10.000 have period % \item[jwdpg] include `page' or `pp' for articles % \item[jwdvol] include `volume' or `vol' for articles % \item[jnm-x] no punctuation after journal name % \item[tit-it] article title in italics % \item[tit-qq] article title in quotes % \item[bt-rm] booktitle in upright font, not italic (this will be issued % with \texttt{btit-rm} normally; separate options allow for % more control if wanted % \item[bt-qq] booktitle of incollection and inproceedings in quotes % \item[qt-s] (with \texttt{tit-qq}) single instead of double quotes % \item[qt-g] (with \texttt{tit-qq}) guillemets instead of quotes % \item[qx] (with \texttt{tit-qq}) comma outside quotes % \item[jtit-x] no article title (applies only to journals and % collections) % \item[atit-u] article title capitalized as in entry, default is % sentence capitalization (first word and words following % colons) % \item[jxper] abbreviated journal names have periods removed, as % `Phys Rev' % \item[jttl-rm] name of journal not in italics % \item[pp-last] pages appear at end, before any notes % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Number and series:} for collections and inproceedings % % This is a confusing issue. The standard wants to print something like % ``number 123 in Collected Works'', and issues a warning if there is a number % without a series. However, for many such works, there is an identification % number for the collection, such as ESA~SP-123. Giving this as the number % without a series results in ``number ESA~SP-123'' and a warning. Setting the % series to this code number produces desired results, but is illogical. % % Another problem is that this code number should often should appear just % before the publisher name, % whereas the standard places it elsewhere. % % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default, number must have series, \textsl{number} is printed % \item[num-xser] default behaviour if both number and series present, but if % only number is there, it is printed without the word \textsl{number} and % without a warning % \item[numser] moves the number/series to just before the publisher/organization % \item[ser-vol] for a book in a series with volume number, appears as ``\textit{Series-Name}, vol.~23'' % rather than ``vol.~23 of \textit{Series-Name}'' % \item[ser-ed] for incollection, inproceedings, the series and volume appear between % the booktitle and the editors % \end{opt} % % % \textbf{Thesis title:} formatted like a book or article % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is like a book title % \item[thtit-a] titles of PhD and Master theses formatted like articles % \item[thtit-x] no thesis title % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Technical Report title:} formatted like book or article % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is like an article title % \item[trtit-b] titles of technical reports formatted like books % \item[trnum-it] \textsl{technical report} and number italic % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Books:} title font style, pages, and address location % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is italicized % \item[btit-rm] book title plain % \item[bkpg-par] pages in books places in parentheses % \item[bkpg-x] pages in books bare without word \textsl{pages} % \item[add-pub] publisher's address before name, colon separated % \item[pub-par] publisher and address in parentheses % \item[pub-date] publisher with address and date in parentheses % \item[pub-xc] with \texttt{pub-date}, suppresses comma before date % \item[pub-xpar] with \texttt{pub-date} to suppress parentheses % \item[pre-pub] publisher placed before chapter and page information % \item[pre-edn] edition before publisher % \item[pg-bk] add number of pages for books and booklets % \item[pg-pre] with \texttt{pg-bk}, total pages comes before publisher % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Abbreviations:} of various words, default is no abbreviations % \begin{opt} % \item[pp] abbreviate \textsl{page(s)} as \textsl{p.} and \textsl{pp.} % \item[ppx] no word \textsl{page(s)} or abbreviation % \item[ed] abbreviate \textsl{editor(s)} as \textsl{ed.} and % \textsl{eds.} % \item[ednx] abbreviates \textsl{edition} as \textsl{ed.} instead % of \textsl{edn.} % \item[abr] abbreviate \textsl{volume}, \textsl{edition}, % \textsl{technical report}, etc. % \item[mth-bare] months abbreviated without dots % \item[jabr] abbreviate names of prestored journals % \item[ord] write edition numbers as 1st, 2nd, instead as words. % \item[xedn] suppress conversion of editions (for English) to avoid % overflowing some \btx\ installations % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Editor:} alternative for \emph{in edited} book, inbook, or proceedings. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] ``in \emph{names}, editors, \emph{title}'' % \item[edpar] ``in \emph{names} (editors), \emph{title}'' % \item[edparc] ``in \emph{names}, (editors) \emph{title}'' % \item[edparxc] ``in \emph{names} (editors) \emph{title}'' % \item[bkedcap] capitalizes ``Editor'' % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Editor:} alternative for \emph{in edited} incollection or inproceedings. % If none of these are selected, they are treated the same as an edited book. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] ``in \emph{names}, editors, \emph{title}'' % \item[edby] ``in \emph{title}, edited by \emph{names}'' % \item[edby-par] ``in \emph{title} (edited by \emph{names})'' % \item[edby-parc] ``in \emph{title}, (edited by \emph{names})'' % \item[edcap] (with \texttt{edby-par}) capitalizes ``Edited by'' or % ``Editor'' % \item[edbyx] (with \texttt{edby} or \texttt{edby-par}) replaces text % \textsl{edited by} by \textsl{editor(s)} before the names, % \item[edbyw] same as \texttt{edbyx} but with word \textsl{editor} only in % parentheses % \item[edbyy] (with \texttt{edby} or \texttt{edby-par}) replaces text % \textsl{edited by} by \textsl{editor(s)} after the names, % as ``in \emph{title}, \emph{names}, editors''. % \end{opt} % % \textbf{ISBN, ISSN numbers:} include or not % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is no ISBN number, ignore this field, % \item[isbn] include an ISBN number as optional entry for books, booklets, % incollections, inproceedings % \item[issn] include an ISSN number for periodicals % \end{opt} % % \textbf{URL address:} include or not, and how % \begin{opt} % \item[--] ignore URL field, % \item[url] process URL field, % \item[url-blk] (with \texttt{url}) URL text as regular blocked item, % \item[url-nt] URL text treated as a note % \item[url-nl] URL text added as new line below reference (Harvard style) % \end{opt} % % \textbf{DOI number:} include or not % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is not to include the Digital Object Identifier % \item[doi] include the DOI number % \item[agu-doi] place DOI number AGU style, as part of page designation % % \end{opt} % % \textbf{REV\TeX\ data fields:} for use with \texttt{revtex.bst}. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] Do not include extra fields for REV\TeX % \item[revdata] Include fields \texttt{collaboration}, \texttt{eid}, % \texttt{numpages} for REV\TeX. % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Eprint field:} used by REV\TeX\ but can be used on its own. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] Do not include \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{archive} fields % \item[eprint] Include \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{archive} fields. % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Reference component tagging:} apply structure to the |\bibitem| contents. % \begin{opt} % \item[--] no tagging. % \item[bibinfo] apply tags like |\bibinfo|, and |\eprint| to the fields of data % in the content of the |\bibitem| statement. % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Emphasis:} defines what `italicized' really means % \begin{opt} % \item[--] default is |\em| (can switch between |\it| % and |\rm| % \item[em-it] use |\it| instead (always italic) % \item[em-x] no emphasis % \item[em-ul] underline for emphasis (with or without \texttt{ulem}) % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Special punctuation:} % \begin{opt} % \item[amper] use \& in place of \textsl{and} % \item[varand] use command |\BIBand| in place of \textsl{and} % \item[and-xcom] no comma before last \textsl{and} of an author list % (citations and references) % \item[and-com] add comma before \textsl{and} even for two authors (in list of % references) % \item[and-com-ed] the same as \texttt{and-com} but for editors in % collections % \item[xand] no \textsl{and} in an author list (references) % \item[etal-it] \textsl{et al.} in italics % \item[etal-rm] \textsl{et al.} in roman even if authors in different font % \item[etal-xc] no comma before \textit{et al.} % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Font commands:} % \begin{opt} % \item[--] use Plain \TeX\ (also \LaTeX~2.09) font commands % \item[nfss] use |\textbf|, |\textit|, |\emph| in place of |\bf|, |\it|, % and |\em|; only works then with \LaTeXe % \end{opt} % % \textbf{Plain \TeX\ compatibility:} % \begin{opt} % \item[--] use \LaTeXe\ commands for testing, redefining commands % \item[plntx] use \TeX\ for maximum compatibility % \end{opt} % % % \section{The Menu Information}\label{sec:menu} % Here I describe the options and menu information for this particular % master file \texttt{\filename}. To construct a \dtx{} driver file % to generate a desired \texttt{.bst} file, simply process \texttt{makebst.tex} % with \TeX\ or \LaTeX, and give % \begin{quote}\tt\filename\end{quote} % when prompted for the name of the master file. Then answer the questions % in the menus that follow. The menu information is extracted from here. % % All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options % |%<*options>| \dots\ |%|, and the last command is % |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between % \begin{quote} % |%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst>| \dots\ || % \end{quote} % in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to % extract the menu information, the documentation driver, or the % \texttt{babelbst.tex} file. % % The main coding is divided into two sections, the \emph{head} and % \emph{tail}; in between come any external language or journal name % support files. The head part is marked with the \dtx{} guard option % || and the tail with ||. This roundabout means of doing % things makes it possible to process \texttt{\filename} with \texttt{.dbj} % files that were generated for the older \texttt{genbst.mbs} file by % simply changing the name of the source file as shown in % Section~\ref{sec:update}. If both \texttt{head} and \texttt{tail} (and % \texttt{exlang}) options are omitted, as they are in the older % \texttt{.dbj} files, \texttt{\filename} is processed completely in one % pass. To include external files, two passes are needed, one for each % part, with the external file(s) coming in between. % % Note too that if the internal language commands are taken (i.e., if % \texttt{exlang} option is not given) then the default language is % English, which is tested for as ||. This too permits the simple % update of older \texttt{.dbj}, at least for English. % % \subsection*{Selecting Language} % Explicit words in the bibliography style, such as \textsl{and}, % \textsl{editor}, etc., % are represented by functions \texttt{bbl.and}, \texttt{bbl.editor}, and so on. % By default these functions translate to the normal English text, but % other languages are also possible. % % The definitions of these functions for other languages are contained in % external files. At this point, we can make use of features in % \texttt{makebst} (version~3.0 or later) to ask for the name of such a % definition file, and store it in |\cfile|. If no external file is % specified, then the internal definitions are taken, for which there are % two possibilities: English or \LaTeX{} commands (Babel). % % The commands |\MBswitch|, |\mes|, |\MBaskfile|, |\wr|, |\pc|, |\spsp| are % defined in \texttt{makebst.tex}. % % If |\MBswitch| does not exist, then the version of \texttt{makebst} % cannot support external files. % % \begin{macrocode} %<*options> \expandafter\ifx\csname beginoptiongroup\endcsname\relax \mes{^^J******************^^J% !!!!!! VERSION CLASH !!!!!!!!!^^J% This mbs file requires makebst version 4.0 or more^^J% You must update makebst to run it with this mbs file^^J% No docstrip batch file can be produced on this run^^J% ******************} \let\temp\endinput\else\let\temp\relax\fi\temp \newif\ifnumerical \newif\ifmytemp \mes{<<< For more information about the meanings of^^J% <<< the various options, see the section on ^^J% <<< Menu Information in the .mbs file documentation.} \umes{EXTERNAL FILES:} \expandafter\ifx\csname MBswitch\endcsname\relax \mes{^^J**************^^J% Makebst version is less than 3.0^^J% Cannot add external file for language definition^^J% **************} \umes{No included files.}% \def\cfile{}\def\jfile{}% \else \MBaskfile{^^JName of language definition file}(\mroot.\mext)i\cfile \edef\ctemp{\mroot.\mext} \ifx\ctemp\cfile\def\cfile{}\fi \umes{Name of language file: \string\cfile=\cfile.}% % \end{macrocode} % % A second type of external file that can be added is one containing names % of journals that are to be prestored into the \texttt{.bst} file. % Several file names are allowed here, with the root names separated by % commas, and with the common extension added at the end. To assist later % parsing of the names, an additional comma is added before the extension. % % Note that in this case |\MBaskfile| treats the file(s) as output, i.e., % it does not check if the file(s) actually exist. % % The macro |\Mgetnext| allows the root names to be extracted from the % list of file names. % \begin{macrocode} \def\jfile{} \ask{\yn}{^^JInclude file(s) for extra journal names? (NO)} \mytempfalse \if!\yn!\else\if\yn n\else\if\yn N\else\mytemptrue\fi\fi\fi \ifmytemp \MBaskfile{^^JFile to include}(physjour,geojour,photjour.mbs)o\jfile \edef\jfile{\froot,.\fext} \umes{Name of included files: \string\jfile=\jfile.}% \else \umes{No included files.}% \fi \fi%MBswitch \def\Mgetnext#1,#2.#3??{\def\froot{#1}\def\Mrest{#2}\def\fext{#3}} % \end{macrocode} % % If no external files are specified, then both |\cfile| and |\jfile| are % empty. In this case, do \emph{not} set the options \texttt{head} and % \texttt{tail}, which control the \dtx{} passes through % \texttt{filename}. Now only one pass is made. % % If there is an external definition file, or if an external list of % journal names, then some extra text must be % written to fit in with that already written by \texttt{makebst}. This is % explained in that documentation. The |\MBswitch| command turns the curly % braces |{..}| into normal characters, and the parentheses |(..)| take on % their grouping functionality. This permits unbalances braces to be % written to the output file. % % \begin{macrocode} \if!\cfile\jfile!\else \begingroup\MBswitch \wr(\spsp head,\string\MBopta}) \if!\cfile!\else \wr(\string\from{\cfile}{\string\MBopta}) \fi \if!\jfile!\else \let\jxfile\jfile \loop % \end{macrocode} % % Parse the list of journal name files, adding a new |\from| for each one. % % \begin{macrocode} \expandafter\Mgetnext\jxfile?? \wr(\string\from{\froot.\fext}{\string\MBopta}) \edef\jxfile(\Mrest.\fext) \if!\Mrest!\def\Mtst(1)\else\def\Mtst()\fi \if!\Mtst! \repeat \fi \wr(\string\from{\mroot.\mext}{tail,\string\MBopta}}) \wr(\string\def\string\MBopta{\pc) \endgroup \fi % \end{macrocode} % % Ask whether % explicit English words wanted or \LaTeX{} commands whose definitions are % to be found in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{INTERNAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT (if no external language file)}% {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{English}{words used explicitly} \optdef{b}{babel}{Babel} {(words replaced by commands defined in babelbst.tex)} \getans \endoptiongroup \if!\cfile!\relax\else \wr{\spsp\spsp exlang,\pc: External language file} \fi % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Author--year or numerical} % The first question is whether a numerical or author--year citation style % is to be used. If the latter, the supporting system is my {\tt % natbib.sty}, which expects |\bibitem| to have an optional argument % containing the short form of the authors, plus year in parentheses. % E.g., % \begin{quote} % |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)]{key}...| % \end{quote} % There is now a newer version of \texttt{natbib.sty} (v5.3) that % supports an optional full author list too, as % \begin{quote} % |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)Daly, Keppler, and Williams]{key}...| % \end{quote} % Other systems are also supported, such as the Harvard family of % bibliography styles (with \texttt{harvard.sty}), which have entries in the % form % \begin{quote} % |\harvarditem[Daly et al.]{Daly, Keppler,|\\ % | and Williams}{1990}{key}...| % \end{quote} % or the astronomy family (with \texttt{astron.sty}) with entries like % \begin{quote} % |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...| % \end{quote} % or the Chicago family (with \texttt{chicago.sty}) with entries like % \begin{quote} % |\bibitem[\protect\citeautheryear{Daly, Keppler, and|\\ % | Williams}{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...| % \end{quote} % or the `named' variant of Chicago (with \texttt{named.sty}) with entries like % \begin{quote} % |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...| % \end{quote} % or the so-called ``author--date'' group (with \texttt{authordate1-4.sty}) % with entries of the form % \begin{quote} % |\bibitem[\protect\citename{Daly et al.}1990]{key}...| % \end{quote} % Finally, there is the \texttt{apalike} format of Oren Patashnik, for use % with \texttt{apalike.sty} that has entries of the form % \begin{quote} % |\bibitem[Daly et al., 1990]{key}...| % \end{quote} % % In addition to numerical or author--year citation styles, there is also a % \texttt{cite} style available in which the label is the same as the cite % key. This is for listing entire contents of databases with the cite key % visible. % % A flag |\ifnumerical| is established because some of the following menu % features depend on which system is to be used. % % The \texttt{alph} option produces labels as in \texttt{alpha.bst}; options % \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f} modify these. Standard is: first three % letters of the single author (Dal90 for Daly, 1990) and first letters of % first three authors (DK90 for Daly and Kopka, 1990). Alternatives are first % three letters of the first author, no matter how many authors there are, and % full name of first author. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{STYLE OF CITATIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Numerical}{as in standard LaTeX} \optdef{a}{ay}{Author-year}{with some non-standard interface} \optdef{b}{alph}{Alpha style, Jon90 or JWB90}{for single or multiple authors} \optdef{o}{alph,alf-1}{Alpha style, Jon90}{even for multiple authors} \optdef{f}{alph,alf-f}{Alpha style, Jones90}{(full name of first author)} \optdef{c}{cite}{Cite key}{(special for listing contents of bib file)} \getans \endoptiongroup \if\ans a\numericalfalse\else\numericaltrue\fi \if\ans b\mytempfalse \else\mytemptrue \fi \beginoptiongroup{HTML OUTPUT (if non author-year citations)} {\ifnumerical*\fi} \optdef{*}{}{Normal LaTeX}{output} \optdef{h}{html}{Hypertext}{output, in HTML code, in paragraphs} \optdef{n}{html,htlist}{Hypertext list}{with sequence numbers} \optdef{k}{html,htdes}{Hypertext with keys}{for viewing databases} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR--YEAR SUPPORT SYSTEM (if author-year citations)} {\ifnumerical\else*\fi} \optdef{*}{nat}{Natbib}{for use with natbib v5.3 or later} \optdef{o}{}{Older Natbib}{without full authors citations} \optdef{l}{alk}{Apalike}{for use with apalike.sty} \optdef{h}{har}{Harvard}{system with harvard.sty} \optdef{a}{ast}{Astronomy}{system with astron.sty} \optdef{c}{cay}{Chicago}{system with chicago.sty} \optdef{n}{nmd}{Named}{system with named.sty} \optdef{d}{cn}{Author-date}{system with authordate1-4.sty} \getans % \end{macrocode} % The \texttt{harvard} family has been extended for \LaTeXe, and the new % \texttt{.bst} files allow the word \textsl{and} and the brackets around years % to be variable with commands. These features may be added too. % The URL field used to be exclusively part of Harvard, but now exists % independently of it too. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{HARVARD EXTENSIONS INCLUDED (if Harvard support selected)} {\if\ans h*\fi}% \optdef{*}{harnm}{With Harvard extensions}{for LaTeX2e version of harvard.sty} \optdef{n}{}{Older Harvard}{style, for LaTeX 2.09} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Language switching} % A \texttt{language} field can be present to specify the original language of % the reference; with \verb!\setlanguge!, the hyphenation patterns are set for % setting the title in that language. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{LANGUAGE FIELD}{} \optdef{*}{}{No language field}{} \optdef{l}{lang}{Add language field}{to switch hyphenation patterns temporarily} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Annotations} % Annotations to a reference are additional information not normally printed % out in the list of references. They are used for listing databases. % The coding here was offered by Soren Dayton. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{ANNOTATIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{No annotations}{will be recognized} \optdef{a}{annote}{Annotations}{in annote field or in .tex file of citekey name} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Presentations} % Presentations are talks at meetings, oral or poster, that are not otherwise % published. The author making the presentation is indicated with the \texttt{key} % entry, which is the speaker's number within the author list. The font used % to highlight the speaker is either bold or italics, depending on the secondary % option, otherwise not highlighted. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{PRESENTATIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Do not add presentation type}{for conference talks} \optdef{p}{pres}{Add presentation, speaker not highlighted}{} \optdef{b}{pres,pres-bf}{Presentation, speaker bold face}{} \optdef{i}{pres,pres-it}{Presentaion, speaker italic}{} \optdef{c}{pres,pres-sc}{Presentaion, speaker in small caps}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Ordering of the listed references} % Choices here depend on citation style. The default in both cases is % alphabetical order of all authors. For numerical style, one may also % choose an unsorted order, which means the order is the same as the original % citations. This corresponds to \texttt{unsrt.bst}. Order of citation is % also offered for author--year for \texttt{natbib}-type styles that can % also be used for numerical listings. % % Another possibility is to order first by year, then authors. This too only % makes sense for numerical citations. However, it is offered for author--year % in the event that a \texttt{natbib}-type style is used for numerical % listings. % % For the alpha style, the ordering is by label only, so no option is % offered here (|\ifnumerical| is \meta{true} and |\ifmytemp| is \meta{false}). % % For author--year, the second choice is by label. (The label is the % optional |\bibitem| argument, and is what is printed in place of the % |\cite| command.) With this option, all the papers with the same first % author are ordered so that the one-author papers come first, followed by % the two-author papers, followed by the multiple-author papers. This is a % more sensible system for author--year citations, and is demanded by some % journals (like JGR). % % One problem that can arise here is when two or more references have the % same set of authors and year; normally they are then ordered by the % title, ignoring initial words like \textsl{the} and \textsl{a}, with the % letters a, b, % c, \dots, added to the year. This can mean that a set of references with % a natural sequence will be put into a different order. An alternative is % to order them by the citation keyword instead of by title. This of course % assumes that the keywords in this case reflect that natural sequence. % \begin{macrocode} \let\ans\relax \beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES (if non-author/year and non-alph)} {\ifnumerical\ifmytemp*\fi\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors} \optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, like unsrt.bst)} \optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors} \optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors} \getans \endoptiongroup % \beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES (if author-year citations)} {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors} \optdef{l}{seq-lab}{By label}% {(Jones before Jones and James before Jones et al)} \optdef{k}{seq-key}{By label and cite key}{instead of label and title, as above} \optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors (for publication lists)} \optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors (most recent first)} \optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, only meaningful for numericals)} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % The standard \btx\ styles consider the \emph{von} part of the name to be a % fixed part of the surname. European usage tends to alphabetize ignoring these % honorifics. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{ORDER ON VON PART (if not citation order)} {\if\ans c\else*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Sort on von part}{(de la Maire before Defoe)} \optdef{x}{vonx}{Sort without von part}{(de la Maire after Mahone)} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Formatting author names} % The default is that the full names of the authors are listed, given names % first, unabbreviated. Of course, if only the initials have been given in % the \texttt{.bib} file, then that is all that can appear in the list. Other % possibilities are to use initials (even if full names in the \texttt{.bib} % file) either before or after the surnames. A specialty of the journals of % the American Geophysical Union is to have only the first name with % reversed initials. % % If the reference is part of a larger work with editors, then the editor % names appear later in the reference text, usually as ``edited by \dots'' % or as ``\emph{names} (editors)''. In these cases, the editor names are % not usually reversed (surname first) even if the authors' names are. % An option is provided to format such editor names exactly as the authors'. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR NAMES:}{} \optdef{*}{ed-au}{Full, surname last}{(John Frederick Smith)} \optdef{f}{nm-revf}{Full, surname first}{(Smith, John Frederick)} \optdef{i}{nm-init,ed-au}{Initials + surname}{(J. F. Smith)} \optdef{r}{nm-rev}{Surname + initials}{(Smith, J. F.)} \optdef{s}{nm-rv}{Surname + dotless initials}{(Smith J F)} \optdef{w}{nm-rvvc}{Surname + comma + spaceless initials}{(Smith, J.F.)} \optdef{x}{nm-rvx}{Surname + pure initials}{(Smith JF)} \optdef{y}{nm-rvcx}{Surname + comma + pure initials}{(Smith, JF)} \optdef{z}{nm-rvv}{Surname + spaceless initials}{(Smith J.F.)} \optdef{a}{nm-rev1}{Only first name reversed, initials}% {(AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)} \optdef{b}{nm-revv1}{First name reversed, with full names}% {(Smith, John Fred, Harry Kab Jones)} \getans \endoptiongroup \mytempfalse \if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans r\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi \beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN COLLECTIONS (if author names reversed)} {\ifmytemp*\fi} \if\ans r \optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith} \fi \if\ans s \optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J J Smith} \fi \if\ans a \optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith} \fi \if\ans x \optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by JJ Smith} \fi \if\ans f \optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith} \fi \if\ans y \optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J.J. Smith} \fi \if\ans b \optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith} \fi \optdef{r}{ed-rev}{Editor names reversed}{just like authors'} \getans \beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF JUNIOR (if author names reversed)} {} \optdef{*}{jnrlst}{Junior comes last}{as Smith, John, Jr.} \optdef{m}{}{Junior between}{as Smith, Jr., John} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{JUNIOR PART IN THE CITATION (if author-year citations)} {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{No `junior' part in the citations}{but in the ref listing} \optdef{j}{jnrlab}{`Junior' in citations}{as well as in ref listing} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN AUTHOR NAMES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Author names separated by commas}{} \optdef{s}{aunm-semi}{Names separated by semi-colon}{} \optdef{h}{aunm-sl}{Names separated by slash}{/} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{ADJACENT REFERENCES WITH REPEATED NAMES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Author/editor names always present}{} \optdef{d}{nmdash}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by dash}{} \optdef{2}{nmdash,nmd-2}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 2 dashes}{} \optdef{3}{nmdash,nmd-3}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 3 dashes}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Number of authors} % Normally the complete list of authors as given in the \texttt{.bib} file is % presented in the reference list. However, some journals prefer to limit % them to a maximum. If there are more than this maximum number of author % names, then a minimum number plus \textsl{et al.} are listed. % % Because no test for consistency of the numbers is carried out in the % \texttt{.bst} file itself (it might be possible, but I found it too complex), % this is done here. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{NUMBER OF AUTHORS IN BIBLIOGRAPHY:}{} \optdef{*}{}{All authors}{included in listing} \optdef{l}{nmlm}{Limited authors}{(et al replaces missing names)} \getans \endoptiongroup \if\ans l \loop \ask{\num}{Maximum number of authors (1-99)} \ifnum\num>99\relax \mes{*** Must be between 1 and 99} \repeat \def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp x#1,\pc: Maximum of #1\space authors} \else\wr{\spsp\spsp x#10,x#2,\pc: Maximum of #1#2\space authors}\fi} \expandafter\parsenum\num\relax \mes{\spsp You have selected maximum \num\space authors} \edef\numx{\num} \loop \ask{\num}{Minimum number (before et al given) (1-\numx)} \ifnum\num>\numx \mes{*** Must be between 1 and \numx} \repeat \def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp m#1,\pc: Minimum of #1\space authors} \else\wr{\spsp\spsp m#10,m#2,\pc: Minimum of #1#2\space authors}\fi} \expandafter\parsenum\num\relax \mes{\spsp You have selected minimum \num\space authors} \fi % \end{macrocode} % % Something that I finally add after being asked many times, is to allow for % more than one name in the citation before inserting \textsl{et~al.} % to allow more than 2 authors before truncating % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{AUTHORS IN CITATIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{One author et al}{for three or more authors} \optdef{m}{mcite}{Some other truncation scheme}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \mytempfalse \if\ans m\mytemptrue\fi \beginoptiongroup{MAX AUTHORS BEFORE ET AL: (if regular cite not selected)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{mct-1}{One et al}{} \optdef{2}{mct-2}{One, Two et al}{} \optdef{3}{mct-3}{One, Two, Three et al}{} \optdef{4}{mct-4}{One, Two, Three, Four et al}{} \optdef{5}{mct-5}{One, Two, Three, Four, Five et al}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{MAX AUTHORS WITHOUT ET AL: (if regular cite not selected)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{mct-x2}{Two authors without truncating}{} \optdef{3}{mct-x3}{Three authors}{without truncating} \optdef{4}{mct-x4}{Four authors}{without truncating} \optdef{5}{mct-x5}{Five authors}{without truncating} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Typeface of names} % The author names in the list of references normally appear in the current % typeface. This may be changed to small caps, bold, or italics. % % Alternatively, the surnames only can be formatted, with the first names in the % regular font. One can also specify that the words `and' and `et~al.'\ should be % in the regular font, or that `et~al.'\ be italic. % % Another possibility is that the names be put into a command |\bibnamefont{..}|, % which must be defined in the \LaTeX\ document. By default, this command does % not format its argument. There is also a |\bibfnamefont| command for the first % names, to be user-defined. % % Editor names in a collection or in a book will not normally have these % fonts applied to them; this may be additionally selected. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Normal font for author names}{} \optdef{s}{nmft,nmft-sc}{Small caps authors}{(\string\sc)} \optdef{i}{nmft,nmft-it}{Italic authors}{(\string\it\space or \string\em)} \optdef{b}{nmft,nmft-bf}{Bold authors}{(\string\bf)} \optdef{u}{nmft,nmft-def}{User defined author font}{(\string\bibnamefont)} \getans \endoptiongroup \mytempfalse \if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi \beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES (if non-default font for authors)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{First names same font as surnames}{} \optdef{r}{fnm-rm}{First names in normal font}{} \optdef{u}{fnm-def}{First names in user defined font}{(\string\bibfnamefont)} \getans \beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Editors incollection normal font}{} \optdef{a}{nmfted}{Editors incollection like authors}{font} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST:}{} \optdef{*}{}{`And' in author font}{(JONES AND JAMES)} \optdef{r}{nmand-rm}{`And' in normal font}{(JONES and JAMES)} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Names in Citation label} % This applies to author--year style only. The label is the text written % by the |\cite| command, and for author--year style, this is something like % `Daly et al.\ (1990b)'. One may select italics for the authors and for the % extra label attached to the year. The year always remains plain. % % This parallels the font selection for the names in the list of references % except that there no choice for the first names, since only surnames % are used in the labels. A user-defined |\citefontname| may also % be selected, but this \emph{must} be defined by the user since there % will be no default definition for it. % % If a font is selected for the cited authors, then the word `and' may be % optionally put in the normal font. % % It is not possible to select the type of brackets for the year, since % this is determined by the \LaTeX{} style option that manages the % author--year citations. This is not standard \LaTeX, so that there are a % number of private style files for achieving this. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT (if author-year citations)} {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Cited authors plain}{as result of \string\cite\space command} \optdef{i}{lab,lab-it}{Cited authors italic}{} \optdef{s}{lab,lab-sc}{Cited authors small caps}{} \optdef{b}{lab,lab-bf}{Cited authors bold}{} \optdef{u}{lab,lab-def}{User defined citation font}{(\string\citenamefont)} \getans \mytempfalse \if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi \beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS (if non-default font for citation lables)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Cited `and' in author font}{} \optdef{r}{and-rm}{Cited `and' in normal font}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{FONT OF EXTRA LABEL (The extra letter on the year)}{} \optdef{*}{}{Extra label plain}{} \optdef{i}{xlab-it}{Extra label italic}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Label for missing author names} % % If the author and/or editor is missing, the standard \texttt{.bst} files % use the \texttt{key} field in place of the names for purposes of ordering the % entries. % % For author--year styles, the \texttt{key} field is even inserted in the % reference list and in the label in place of the authors. Optionally, one can % suppress the year in this case, which causes \texttt{natbib} (version~7) % to print only that key text as a code designation for the work. Thus if % \texttt{KEY = "CS1-345"} and there are no authors, then |\citep| produces % (CS1-345) and |\citet| simply CS1-345. That is, they behave like % |\citeauthor|. If \texttt{natbib} did not recognize the blank year, one would % get (CS1-345, ) and CS1-345 (). (Earlier versions of \texttt{natbib} crash on % a blank year.) % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING (if author-year citations)} {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% \optdef{*}{keyxyr}{Year blank when KEY replaces missing author}{(for natbib 7.0)} \optdef{y}{}{Year included when KEY replaces missing author}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Missing date} % A missing date can be set to ???? or simply left blank. In the latter case, % \texttt{natbib} version~7 will print only the authors without any year % punctuation or brackets. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{MISSING DATE (if author-year citations)} {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Missing date set to ????}{in label and text} \optdef{b}{blkyear}{Missing date left blank}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Position of date} % This applies to author--year style only. It makes sense to put the date % immediately after the author list, since the two items (author and year) % are the identifiers of the reference. Default position is at the % end of the references, before any notes. It is also possible to place % it even after the notes. % % Medical journals have a system where the date is part of the journal % specification, as Lancet 1994;45(2):34--40. Otherwise the date appears at % the end. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{DATE POSITION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Date at end}{} \optdef{b}{dt-beg}{Date after authors}{} \optdef{j}{dt-jnl}{Date part of journal spec.}{(as 1994;45:34-40) else at end} \optdef{e}{dt-end}{Date at very end}{after any notes} \getans \endoptiongroup \if\ans b\mytemptrue\else\if\ans j\mytemptrue\else\mytempfalse\fi\fi % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Format of date} % The year may be enclosed in parentheses, brackets, or preceded by a % colon. If none of these are selected, the date (month plus year) appears. % For author--year, the date normally consists only of the year, no month, % but this may be overridden. % % If the date comes just after the authors, then one might want special % punctuation following it, like a colon, or space only. The latter is % probably desirable if the date is brackets or parentheses. % % The date can even be put into bold face. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT (if non author-year citations)} {\ifnumerical*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Plain month and year}{without any brackets} \optdef{p}{yr-par}{Date in parentheses}{as (May 1993)} \optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Date in brackets}{as [May 1993]} \optdef{c}{yr-col}{Date preceded by colon}{as `: May 1993'} \optdef{d}{yr-per}{Date preceded by period}{as `. May 1993'} \optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, May 1993'} \optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Date preceded by space}{only, as ` May 1993'} \getans \beginoptiongroup{SUPPRESS MONTH:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Date is month and year}{} \optdef{x}{xmth}{Date is year only}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE (if including month)} {\if\ans x\else*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{} \optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT (if author-year citations)} {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Year plain}{without any brackets} \optdef{p}{yr-par}{Year in parentheses}{as (1993)} \optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Year in brackets}{as [1993]} \optdef{c}{yr-col}{Year preceded by colon}{as `: 1993'} \optdef{d}{yr-per}{Year preceded by period}{as `. 1993'} \optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, 1993'} \optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Year preceded by space}{only, as ` 1993'} \getans \beginoptiongroup{INCLUDE MONTHS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Date is year only}{without the month} \optdef{m}{aymth}{Include month in date}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE (if including month)} {\if\ans m*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{} \optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{DATE PUNCTUATION (if date not at end)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Date with standard block punctuation}{(comma or period)} \optdef{c}{yrp-col}{Colon after date}{as 1994:} \optdef{s}{yrp-semi}{Semi-colon after date}{as 1994;} \optdef{p}{yrp-per}{Period after date}{even when blocks use commas} \optdef{x}{yrp-x}{No punct. after date}{} \getans \beginoptiongroup{BLANK AFTER DATE:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Space after date}{and punctuation} \optdef{x}{yrpp-xsp}{No space after date}{as 1994:45} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{DATE FONT:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Date in normal font}{} \optdef{b}{dtbf}{Date in bold face}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % Normally in author--year citations, the \texttt{year} entry is truncated % to the last 4 characters, which should be the 4 digits of the year. Some % users have requested the possibility of suppressing this truncation so % that they may put text in the \texttt{year} field, such as ``in press.'' % Another use for it is when years are given as ``1968--72''. Actually, % I have no idea why the year should be truncated at all. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{TRUNCATE YEAR (if author-year citations)} {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% \optdef{*}{note-yr}{Year text full}{as 1990--1993 or `in press'} \optdef{t}{}{Year truncated}{to last 4 digits} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Article title in journal} % The title of an article in a journal or in a collection (a book, or % conference proceedings) may appear plain, in italics, within single % or double quotes or even in guillemets. The last is best with T1 coding; a % poor man's version for OT1 is provided; \LaTeXe\ is required in both cases. % % Furthermore, it may have sentence capitalization (first % word and word following colon) or be capitalized as in the \texttt{.bib} file % entry. That is why it is recommended to capitalize the entry text as it % should appear when fully capitalized, putting words that are always % capitalized in braces. Example: % \begin{quote} % |TITLE="The Results of the {Giotto} Mission"| % \end{quote} % which produces either ``The results of the Giotto mission'' or ``The % Results of the Giotto Mission'', depending on option. % % Additionally, the article titles may be fully suppressed. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{TITLE OF ARTICLE:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Title plain}{with no special font} \optdef{i}{tit-it}{Title italic}{(\string\em)} \optdef{q}{tit-qq,qt-s}{Title and punctuation in single quotes}{(`Title,' ..)} \optdef{d}{tit-qq}{Title and punctuation in double quotes}{(``Title,'' ..)} \optdef{g}{tit-qq,qt-g}{Title and punctuation in guillemets}{(<> ..)} \optdef{x}{tit-qq,qt-s,qx}{Title in single quotes}{(`Title', ..)} \optdef{y}{tit-qq,qx}{Title in double quotes}{(``Title'', ..)} \optdef{z}{tit-qq,qt-g,qx}{Title in guillemets}{(<>, ..)} \getans \endoptiongroup \mytempfalse \if\ans q\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans d\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans g\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans z\mytemptrue\fi \beginoptiongroup{COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES (if quoted title)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{bt-qq}{Quote collection and proceedings titles}{too} \optdef{x}{}{Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Sentence style}{(capitalize first word and those in braces)} \optdef{t}{atit-u}{Title style}{(just as in bib entry)} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Article title present}{in journals and proceedings} \optdef{x}{jtit-x}{No article title}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Journal names} % Abbreviated journal names normally contain periods; the periods may be % removed with this option. In fact, only letters, numbers, and spacing are % retained. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAMES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Periods in journal names}{are retained, as `Phys. Rev.'} \optdef{x}{jxper}{Dotless journal names}{as `Phys Rev'} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % Journal name is normally printed in italics; can be left in normal font. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME FONT:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Journal name italics}{} \optdef{r}{jttl-rm}{Journal name normal}{font} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Title of Theses and Technical Reports} % The title of a these (PhD or Master's) is normally treated the same % as that of a book. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of % an article. % % The title of a technical report is normally treated the same as that % of an article. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of a book. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{THESIS TITLE:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Thesis titles like books}{} \optdef{a}{thtit-a}{Thesis title like article}{} \optdef{x}{thtit-x}{No thesis title}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Tech. report title like articles}{} \optdef{b}{trtit-b}{Tech. report title like books}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Tech. report and number plain}{as `Tech. Rep. 123'} \optdef{i}{trnum-it}{Tech. report and number italic}% {as `{\string\it\space Tech. Rep. 123'}} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Journal reference} % Great diversity of opinion exists as to how a journal reference is to be % formatted. It consists of a volume, possibly a number, and page limits. % The number is really only necessary if the page numbers within one volume % start at 1 for each physical `number'. Since journals are often bound % together in one volume later, it makes more sense to number the pages % continuously through the whole volume. % % I am only aware of one journal that used to reset the pagination for each % `number', in which case the number was part of the page designation. % I had erroneously provided an option \texttt{vnum-pg} to achieve this, but I % now realize that instead, for this one journal, the database entries must % contain \texttt{pages="(2)33--2(55)"}. This option has been removed at % version 3.84. % % A number of styles for journal specifications are % \begin{quote} % \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l} % 21(2):33--55 & 21, no.\ 2: 33--55\\ % \textbf{21}(2):33--55 & \textbf{21}, \#2, 33--55\\ % \textit{21}(2), 33--55 & \textit{21} (2); 33--55 \\ % 21(2) (1995) 33--55 & 21(1995), 33-55\\ % 21(2) 33--55 & vol.~21 (2), pp.~33--55 % \end{tabular} % \end{quote} % % Here both start and stop page numbers have been given; often only the % start page is wanted. % % It is also possible to include the year as part of the journal specification, % in which case the year is always in parentheses, attached snugly or with space % to the volume, or preceding the pages. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOLUME:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Volume plain}{as vol(num)} \optdef{i}{vol-it}{Volume italic}{as {\string\em\space vol}(num)} \optdef{b}{vol-bf}{Volume bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol}(num)} \optdef{d}{vol-2bf}{Volume and number bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol(num)}} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % The form of the `number' is also given: in parentheses, with `no.', % with \#, or omitted. The \texttt{vnum-b} option is meant to be used % with \texttt{jdt-v} and \texttt{jdt-vs} but could be used alone. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Journal vol(num)}{as 34(2)} \optdef{s}{vnum-sp}{Journal vol (num)}{as 34 (2)} \optdef{c}{vnum-cm}{Journal vol, num}{as 34, 2} \optdef{n}{vnum-nr}{Journal vol, no. num}{as 34, no. 2} \optdef{h}{vnum-h}{Journal vol, \string\# number}{as 34, \string\#2} \optdef{b}{vnum-b}{Journal vol number}{as 34 2} \optdef{x}{vnum-x}{Journal vol, without number}{as 34} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{VOLUME PUNCTUATION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Volume with colon}{as vol(num):ppp} \optdef{s}{volp-sp}{Volume with colon and space}{as vol(num): ppp} \optdef{h}{volp-semi}{Volume with semi-colon}{as vol(num); ppp} \optdef{c}{volp-com}{Volume with comma}{as vol(num), ppp} \optdef{b}{volp-blk}{Volume with blank}{as vol(num) ppp} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Journal year like others}{as given by date position} \optdef{v}{jdt-v}{Journal vol(year)}{as 34(1995)} \optdef{s}{jdt-vs}{Journal vol (year)}{as 34 (1995)} \optdef{p}{jdt-p}{Year with pages}{as 34(2), (1995) 1345--1387} \optdef{c}{jdt-pc}{Year, comma, pages}{as 34(2), (1995), 1345--1387} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PAGE NUMBERS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Start and stop page numbers}{given} \optdef{f}{jpg-1}{Only start page number}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{LARGE PAGE NUMBERS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{No separators for large page numbers}{} \optdef{c}{pgsep-c}{Comma inserted over 9999}{as 11,234} \optdef{s}{pgsep-s}{Thin space inserted over 9999}{as 11 234} \optdef{p}{pgsep-p}{Period inserted over 9999}{as 11.234} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Article pages numbers only}{as 234-256} \optdef{p}{jwdpg}{Include `page' in articles}{as pp. 234--256} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % Some journals want page numbers at the end, even for books, proceedings, as % well as for journals. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF PAGES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Pages given mid text}{as is normal} \optdef{e}{pp-last}{Pages at end}{but before any notes} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Article volume as number only}{as 21} \optdef{p}{jwdvol}{Include `volume' in articles}{as vol. 21} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % Fiddle with the format and location of the number/series for collections and % inproceedings. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{num-xser}{Allows number without series}{and suppresses word "number"} \optdef{s}{}{Standard BibTeX}{as: "number 123 in Total Works"; error if number and no series} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{After chapter and pages}{as in standard BibTeX} \optdef{t}{numser}{Just before publisher}{or organization} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % Fiddle with the format and location of series and volume with books and collections. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Vol. 23 of Series}{as in standard BibTeX} \optdef{s}{ser-vol}{Series, vol. 23}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Series and volume after the editors}{} \optdef{e}{ser-ed}{Series and volume after booktitle}{and before editors} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % It is possible to decide whether the journal name should be % separated from the following specifications with a blank or comma. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Comma after journal}{name} \optdef{x}{jnm-x}{Space after journal}{name} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Books} % The title of a book (as opposed to an article in a book or journal) is % normally italicized. This may be set to the regular font. % % The page numbers in books may be set in parentheses, as (pp.\ 345--350). % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{BOOK TITLE:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Book title italic}{(\string\em)} \optdef{p}{btit-rm,bt-rm}{Book title plain}{(no font command)} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PAGES IN BOOKS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Pages in book plain}{as pp. 50-55} \optdef{p}{bkpg-par}{Pages in book in parentheses}{as (pp. 50-55)} \optdef{x}{bkpg-x}{Pages in book bare}{as 50-55} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Total book pages not printed}{} \optdef{p}{pg-bk}{For book: 345 pages}{or pp.} \optdef{a}{pg-bk,pg-pre}{Total book pages before publisher}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % Some psychology journals wish to have the publisher's address preceding % the name, separated by colon, as % \begin{quote}New York: Wiley and Sons\end{quote} % % Some journals (e.g.\ Nature) put publisher in parentheses with date, % as (Wiley and Sons, New York, 1983). These normally put the date in % parentheses at the end anyway, so this is a merging of the two sets of % parentheses. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER ADDRESS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Publisher, address}{as Harcourt, New York} \optdef{a}{add-pub}{Address: Publisher}{as New York: Harcourt} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Publisher as normal block}{without parentheses} \optdef{p}{pub-par}{Publisher in parentheses}{} \optdef{d}{pub-date}{Publisher and date in parentheses}{(Oxford, 1994)} \optdef{c}{pub-date,pub-xc}{Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma}{(Oxford 1994)} \optdef{f}{pub-date,pub-xpar}{Publisher and date without parentheses}{Oxford, 1994} \optdef{k}{pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc}{Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma}{Oxford 1994} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER POSITION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Publisher after chapter, pages}{} \optdef{p}{pre-pub}{Publisher before chapter, pages}{} \optdef{e}{pre-edn}{Publisher after edition}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{ISBN, ISSN, DOI numbers} % Books normally possess an ISBN number. This may be included as an % optional entry for \texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{booklet}, % \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{proceedings}, \texttt{inproceedings}. % However, it should be suppressed for \texttt{inbook} etc.\ when % there is a crossref to another book with the ISBN number. % % Periodicals contain an ISSN number. Add this to \texttt{article}, or % course, but also to \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings}, since % they are sometimes printed in a periodical. % % Journal articles that appear online are given a DOI number, something more % robust than a URL that can change as machines are upgraded. % The American Geophysical Union (AGU) uses the DOI as part of the % page number substitution for electronic journals, placing the number % where the pages would normally appear. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{ISBN NUMBER:}{} \optdef{*}{isbn}{Include ISBN}{for books, booklets, etc.} \optdef{x}{}{No ISBN}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{ISSN NUMBER:}{} \optdef{*}{issn}{Include ISSN}{for periodicals} \optdef{x}{}{No ISSN}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{DOI NUMBER:}{} \optdef{*}{doi}{Include DOI}{as "doi: number"} \optdef{a}{agu-doi,doi}{Insert DOI AGU style}{as part of page number} \optdef{x}{}{No DOI}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Editor of book without author} % % This is normally % \begin{quote} % J. K. James, editor % \end{quote} % but may also be % \begin{quote} % J. K. James, (editor)\\ % J. K. James (editor), % \end{quote} % Alternatively, the word \textsl{editor} may be capitalized and/or % abbreviated. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS):}{} \optdef{*}{}{Word `editor' after name}{} \optdef{a}{edpar}{`Name (editor),'}{in parentheses, after name, comma after} \optdef{b}{edpar,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor),'}{as above, editor upper case} \optdef{c}{edparc}{`Name, (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, comma between} \optdef{d}{edparc,bkedcap}{`Name, (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case} \optdef{e}{edparxc}{`Name (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, no commas} \optdef{f}{edparxc,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Edited by} % For an article within an edited collection, the normal form is % \begin{quote} % In J. K. James, editor, \emph{Title of Collection} \dots % \end{quote} % Alternative forms are % \begin{quote} % In J. K. James (editor), \emph{Title} \dots\\ % In \emph{Title}, edited by J. K. James \dots\\ % In \emph{Title} (Edited by J. K. James) \dots % \end{quote} % If none of the \texttt{edby} variations is used, then the same system is % used as for edited books, i.e. \texttt{edpar} applies. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Same as for edited book}{(names before booktitle)} \optdef{b}{edby}{In booktitle, edited by .. }{(where .. is names)} \optdef{p}{edby-par}{In booktitle (edited by ..)}{} \optdef{c}{edby-parc}{In booktitle, (edited by ..)}{} \optdef{e}{edby,edbyx}{In booktitle, editor ..}{} \optdef{f}{edby,edbyw}{In booktitle, (editor) ..}{} \optdef{k}{edby-par,edbyx}{In booktitle (editor..)}{} \optdef{g}{edby-parc,edbyx}{In booktitle, (editor..)}{} \optdef{j}{edby,edbyy}{In booktitle, .., editor}{} \optdef{m}{edby-par,edbyy}{In booktitle (.., editor)}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \mytempfalse \if\ans p\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans k\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi \beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY' (if editor capitalizable)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{`(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)'}{in lower case} \optdef{c}{edcap}{`(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)'}{in upper case} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Block punctuation} % Blocks are logical sections of the reference specification, such as the % author block, the journal block, editor block, etc. These are normally % separated by periods, but alternatively a comma may be used. Another % choice is to use commas except after titles where a period is given. % % \LaTeX\ offers an \texttt{openbib} option, which means that the blocks % are not only new sentences, but new lines as well. This can only % function when the default option here is taken, for then the command % |\newblock| is placed between the blocks. This command is normally % defined to do nothing, but \LaTeX\ redefines it to issue a new line % when open bibliographies are wanted. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS):}{} \optdef{*}{}{\string\newblock\space after blocks} {(periods or new lines with openbib option)} \optdef{c}{blk-com}{Comma between blocks}{} \optdef{s}{blk-com,com-semi}{Semi-colon between blocks}{} \optdef{b}{blk-com,com-blank}{Blanks between blocks}{} \optdef{t}{blk-tit}{Period after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas} \optdef{u}{blk-tit,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas} \optdef{a}{blk-tita}{Period after titles of articles}{else commas} \optdef{d}{blk-tita,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles}{else commas} \getans \endoptiongroup \mytempfalse \if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans t\mytemptrue\fi \if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi \beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES (if not using \string\newblock)} {\ifmytemp*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{Notes have regular punctuation}{like all other blocks} \optdef{p}{blknt}{Notes preceded by period}{} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Author block normal}{with regular block punctuation} \optdef{c}{au-col}{Author block with colon}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{\textsl{In} with colon} % When referring to works in a collection, one begins the block describing % that collection with \textsl{In}. Optionally, one may add a colon. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN':}{} \optdef{*}{}{Space after `in'}{for incollection or inproceedings} \optdef{c}{in-col}{Colon after `in'}{(as `In: ...')} \optdef{i}{in-it}{Italic `in'}{and space} \optdef{d}{in-col,in-it}{Italic `in' and colon}{} \optdef{x}{in-x}{No word `in'}{for edited works} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES (if using 'in' with collections)} {\if\ans x\else*\fi} \optdef{*}{}{No `in' before journal name}{} \optdef{i}{injnl}{Add `in' before journal name}{in style for incollection} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Final punctuation} % The punctuation at the end of the reference is normally a period. This % may be suppressed. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{FINAL PUNCTUATION:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Period at very end}{of the listed reference} \optdef{x}{fin-bare}{No period at end}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Abbreviations} % A number of words may be abbreviated: pages, editors, volume, chapter, % and so on. The first two may be independently set to abbreviation, the % rest with a single option. % % Additionally, the edition numbers may be % output as words (first, second, etc.) or as numbers (1st, 2nd, etc.). % (Recall that the input in the \texttt{.bib} file is always as English % words.) % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' (if not using external language file)} {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)} \optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.} \optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{} \getans \beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{} \optdef{*}{}{`Editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)} \optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edition, chapter, etc} \optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' (if abbreviating words)} {\if\ans a*\fi}% \optdef{*}{}{`Edition' abbreviated as `edn'}{} \optdef{a}{ednx}{`Edition' abbreviated as `ed'}{} \getans \beginoptiongroup{MONTHS WITH DOTS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Months with dots}{as Jan.} \optdef{x}{mth-bare}{Months without dots}{as Feb Mar} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{} \optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory} \optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as first, second, third, etc} \optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % The above choices about abbreviations are made only if the internal % languages are taken (English or \texttt{babel}). For an external language % definition file, these choices, along with possible other ones, are made % in the external file, which is read in at this point. % \begin{macrocode} \umes{Reading external language file \string\cfile=\cfile}% \if!\cfile!\relax\else \input\cfile \fi % \end{macrocode} % % This file contains the standard set of stored journal names present in % the basic bibliography style files. If other files containing journal % names are to be included, they may only contain the options \texttt{jabr} % or \texttt{jaa} since these options are selected here. No option % menus from the journal-name files will be read in. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{STORED JOURNAL NAMES:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Full journal names}{for prestored journals} \optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviated journal names}{} \optdef{s}{jabr,jaa}{Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands}{like ApJ and AJ} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Variations on \textsl{and}} % It is possible to replace the word \textsl{and} with an ampersand \&, and to % specify whether a comma is to precede \textsl{and} in a list of more than two % names. % % A variable \textsl{and} may be provided for with the command |\BIBand| % in place of the word. In this case, the command must be defined in the % document file or some other package called. (This is intended for situations % where an ampersand is wanted in parenthetical citations, but the word in % textual ones.) % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{AMPERSAND:}{} \optdef{*}{}{Use word `and'}{in author lists} \optdef{a}{amper}{Use ampersand}{in place of `and'} \optdef{v}{varand}{Use \string\BIBand}{in place of `and'} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND':}{} \optdef{*}{}{Comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, and Harry'} \optdef{n}{and-xcom}{No comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick and Harry'} \optdef{c}{and-com}{Comma even with 2 authors}{as `Tom, and Harry'} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS (if using comma before `and' with authors)} {\if\ans c*\fi}% \optdef{*}{and-com-ed}{Comma with 2 editors}{in collections} \optdef{x}{}{Two editors without comma}{as `Tom and Harry'} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST:}{} \optdef{*}{}{With `and'}{before last author in reference list} \optdef{x}{xand}{No `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, Harry'} \getans \endoptiongroup \beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `ET AL':}{} \optdef{*}{}{Comma before `et al'}{in reference list} \optdef{x}{etal-xc}{No comma before `et al'}{} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Font of \textsl{et al}} % One can chose that \textsl{et~al.}\ be put into italics. % Or, if the authors are in a different font from the regular one, the % \textsl{et~al.}\ can still be Roman. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{FONT OF `ET AL':}{} \optdef{*}{}{Plain et al}{} \optdef{i}{etal-it}{Italic et al}{} \optdef{r}{etal-rm}{Roman et al}{even when authors something else} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Additional Data Fields}\label{sec:revtex} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the revdata option group} % The American Physical Society's REV\TeX\ package contains \btx\ support % with a \texttt{bst} file generated from a variant of % \texttt{\filename}. The extra fields are also available here. % \begin{itemize} % \item \textbf{collaboration}: A collaboration name associated with a % reference. % \item \textbf{eprint}: The e-print citation for the reference (Los Alamos % or otherwise). E-print numbers can be turned into hyperlinks to the % online article. The output is\\ % \hspace*{2em}|\eprint{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}| % \item \textbf{archive}: is an optional argument for |\eprint|, as\\ % \hspace*{2em}|\eprint[|\textit{archive-des}|]{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|\\ % The \textit{archive-des} is some code such as \texttt{arXiv} that is % translated to a base URL by a class or package file. The default definition % of |\eprint| ignores \textit{archive-des} and prints \textit{eprint-spec} % as a URL. % \item \textbf{url}: A URL associated with the reference. Can be turned % into a hyperlink. % \end{itemize} % % A collaboration appears as part of the author list and the other two % appear at the end of the citaton. The URL field can be selected % independently of this option. % % In addition there are new fields for journals like Phys.\ Rev.~D that % no longer use page numbers. % \begin{itemize} % \item \textbf{eid}: Electronic article identifier. % \item \textbf{numpages}: Number of pages in an article. For use in % conjunction with the \textbf{eid} field when page counts are % desired. Deprecated when submitting to Phys.\ Rev. % % The \texttt{eprint} (with \texttt{archive}) and \texttt{url} fields may be % included independently of the other REV\TeX\ fields. % % The \texttt{eid} field is now always included, although it is optional for % the bibliography entries. This electronic identifier is a replacement for the % page number in electronic journals: it is the sequence number in the printed % volume. If present, it will be used in place of the page number. % % \end{itemize} % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{No additional fields}{for REVTeX} \optdef{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk}{Include REVTeX data fields} {collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, numpages, url} \getans \mytemptrue \if\ans r\mytempfalse\fi \beginoptiongroup{E-PRINT DATA FIELD: (without REVTeX fields)} {\ifmytemp*\fi} \optdef{*}{}{Do not include eprint field}{} \optdef{e}{eprint}{Include eprint and archive fields}{for electronic publications} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{URL address} % For electronic documents with an Internet address, add a URL entry. % Harvard already has this, but here it is done for all styles. % The URL text will be set with the \verb!\url! command in the \texttt{url} % package by Donald Arseneau. This package must be loaded for the command % to work right. It allows line breaks at punctuations. Otherwise, % \verb!\texttt! is used instead, with no line breaks. The URL text is preceded % by \verb!\urlprefix! which defaults to ``URL '' but may be redefined by the % user to be whatever s/he wants. The final space must be included. % % Note: selecting the REV\TeX\ fields automatically includes this, so the % offer only is made if REV\TeX\ has been rejected. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{URL ADDRESS: (without REVTeX fields)}{\ifmytemp*\fi} \optdef{*}{}{No URL}{for electronic (Internet) documents} \optdef{u}{url,url-blk}{Include URL}{as regular item block} \optdef{n}{url,url-nt}{URL as note}{} \optdef{l}{url,url-nl}{URL on new line}{after rest of reference} \getans \endoptiongroup \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Reference Component Tagging} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the bibinfo option group} % If reference component tagging is enabled, we % apply tags like |\bibinfo| and |\eprint| to the fields of data % in the content of the |\bibitem| statement. We also ensure that % these commands have a default meaning within the scope of the |thebibliography| % environment. The default definitions simply print the field and ignore the % tag. However, other programs or packages might make use of the tag % information to separate authors from title, for example. % % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS:}{} \optdef{*}{}{No reference component tags} {in the \string\bibitem\space entries} \optdef{b}{bibinfo}{Reference component tags} {like \string\bibinfo\space in the content of \string\bibitem} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Define emphasis} % In everything that been mentioned so far, italicization should be % understood to mean `emphasize' in the \LaTeX{} sense. This means that the % command |\em| is used. This is not the same as |\it|, which is always % italics. Rather, with |\em|, the font style switches between |\rm| and % |\it| depending on the context. Here one may choose to true italics, or % to switch off italics altogether. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{EMPHASIS: (affects all so-called italics)}{} \optdef{*}{}{Use emphasis}{ie, \string\em, allows font switching} \optdef{i}{em-it}{Use true italics}{ie, \string\it, absolute italics} \optdef{x}{em-x}{No italics}{at all} \optdef{u}{em-ul}{Underlining}{in place of italics, best with ulem package} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection*{Plain \TeX\ compatibility} % Bold face, italics, and emphasis are made with the \LaTeXe\ commands, % which makes them incompatible with the obsolete \LaTeX2.09, and with % Plain \TeX. There are also some extra testing for existing commands % that best work with \LaTeXe\ syntax. % % If the bibliography style file is to be fully compatible with Plain \TeX, % do not select the option \texttt{nfss} but do take \texttt{plntx}. % \begin{macrocode} \beginoptiongroup{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX:}{} \optdef{*}{nfss}{Use LaTeX commands}{which may not work with Plain TeX} \optdef{t}{plntx}{Use only Plain TeX}{commands for fonts and testing} \getans \endoptiongroup % \end{macrocode} % % Terminate the options list. If a language definition file has been called, % then we have a closing brace too many, so add another dummy opening brace. % \begin{macrocode} \if!\cfile\jfile!\else \begingroup\MBswitch \wr(,{\pc) \endgroup \fi \endoptions %</options> % \end{macrocode} % \StopEventually{\PrintChanges} % % \section{The Bibliographic Coding} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!options&!driver&!bblbst> %<*!tail> % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later %------------------------------------------------------------------- %<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> % WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING % The input dbj file contains one of the options %<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> % nmft-it, nmft-bf, nmft-sc, or nmft-def %<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> % lab-it, lab-bf, lab-sc, or lab-def % without the corresponding general option(s): %<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> % nmft %<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> % lab % (You may be using an older dbj with a newer version of merlin.mbs) % Please edit your dbj file to add the general option(s) and reprocess. % %</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> %<*!exlang> %<!babel> % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH %<*babel> % This bibliography style file requires a file named babelbst.tex % containing the definitions of word commands like \bbleditor, etc. %</babel> %</!exlang> %<*exlang> % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in %<bahasa> % BAHASA %<brazilian> % BRAZILIAN %<catalan> % CATALAN %<croatian> % CROATIAN %<czech> % CZECH %<danish> % DANISH %<dansk> % DANSK %<dutch> % DUTCH %<english> % ENGLISH %<esperanto> % ESPERANTO %<finnish> % FINNISH %<french> % FRENCH %<galacian> % GALACIAN %<german> % GERMAN %<hungarian> % HUNGARIAN %<italian> % ITALIAN %<norwegian> % NORWEGIAN %<norsk> % NORWEGIAN %<polski> % POLISH %<polish> % POLISH %<portuguese> % PORTUGUESE %<romanian> % ROMANIAN %<russian> % RUSSIAN %<slovak> % SLOVAK %<slovenian> % SLOVENIAN %<slovene> % SLOVENIAN %<spanish> % SPANISH %<swedish> % SWEDISH %<turkish> % TURKISH %</exlang> %<*!html> %<*ay> % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly. % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly %<*alk> % or: apalike.sty by Oren Patashnik % The form of the \bibitem entries is % \bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{key}... %</alk> %<*!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)> % The form of the \bibitem entries is % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}... %<nat> % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}... % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening % parenthesis! %<nat> % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year. % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must % be parentheses in the label. % The \cite command functions as follows: % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990) %<nat> % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990) % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990) %<nat> % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990) % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2) % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990) % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32) % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al. %<nat> % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990 %</!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)> %<*har> % or: harvard.sty by Peter Williams and Thorsten Schnier %<harnm> % (needs natbib v5.3 or harvard v2.0.3) % The form of the bibitem entries is % \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Smith}{1990}{key}... %</har> %<*cay> % or: chicago.sty % The form of the bibitem entries is % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones, Baker, and Smith} % {Jones et al.}{1990}{key}... %</cay> %<*nmd> % or: named.sty % The form of the bibitem entries is % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}... %</nmd> %<*ast> % or: astron.sty % The form of the bibitem entries is % \bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}... %</ast> %<*cn> % or: authordate1-4.sty % The form of the bibitem entries is % \bibitem[\protect\citename{Jones et al.}1990]{key}... %</cn> %</ay> %<*!ay> %<*!alph&!cite> % This is a numerical citation style, and as such is standard LaTeX. %</!alph&!cite> %<*alph> % This is a labelled citation style similar to the standard alpha.bst, % where labels are of the form Dal90 or DBK89. %</alph> %<*cite&!alph> % This is a special pseudo-numerical bibliography style, intended to be % used to list all the entries in a bib database %</cite&!alph> % It requires no extra package to interface to the main text. % The form of the \bibitem entries is %<!alph&!cite> % \bibitem{key}... %<alph> % \bibitem[label]{key}... %<!alph&cite> % \bibitem[key]{key}... %<*!cite|alph> % Usage of \cite is as follows: %<*!alph&!cite> % \cite{key} ==>> [#] % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [#, chap. 2] % where # is a number determined by the ordering in the reference list. %</!alph&!cite> %<*alph> % \cite{key} ==>> [label] % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [label, chap. 2] % The order in the reference list is by label. %</alph> %<*seq-no&!alph> % The order in the reference list is that by which the works were originally % cited in the text, or that in the database. %</seq-no&!alph> %<*!seq-no&!alph> % The order in the reference list is alphabetical by authors. %</!seq-no&!alph> %</!cite|alph> %</!ay> %</!html> %<*html> % This bibliographic style file produces HTML output instead of LaTeX. % The LaTeX special characters are not translated, so that the output % (which has the .bbl ending still) will have to be further massaged, % and renamed with .html or .htm. The title and heading may also need % to be revised. % %<htlist&!htdes> % The output is a numbered list. %<htdes> % The output is an unnumbered list with the keys printed %<htdes> % before each entry. %<!htlist&!htdes> % The output is lists each entry as one paragraph. %</html> %--------------------------------------------------------------------- % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`ENTRY'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add URL entry type for \texttt{harnm} option} % The new \texttt{harvard.sty} of \LaTeXe{} includes an entry URL, or % rather it is included in the new \texttt{.bst} files for it. Add it % here too, but only for option \texttt{harnm}. % % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add optional entries \texttt{isbn}} % Books normally have an ISBN number. % This entry is (optionally) included, modelled after that in % \texttt{xbtxbst.doc}. % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the \texttt{revdata} data} % % \begin{macrocode} ENTRY { address %<annote> annote %<eprint> archive author booktitle chapter %<revdata> collaboration %<doi> doi edition editor eid %<eprint> eprint howpublished institution %<isbn> isbn %<issn> issn journal key %<lang> language month note number %<revdata> numpages organization pages publisher school series title type %<url|harnm|revdata> url volume year } {} %<!ay&!alph> { label } %<!ay&alph> { label extra.label sort.label } %<ay> { label extra.label sort.label short.list } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`init.state.consts'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {init.state.consts} { #0 'before.all := #1 'mid.sentence := #2 'after.sentence := #3 'after.block := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % |s| and |t| are general-purpose scratch registers whose value does not persist % past the end of a function. They also do not appear to be used to communicate % between functions or to be clobbered within a sub-function call. Hopefully. % \begin{macrocode} STRINGS { s t} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`output.nonnull'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {output.nonnull} { 's := output.state mid.sentence = %<!blk-com|(!com-semi&!com-blank)> { ", " * write$ } %<blk-com&com-semi> { "; " * write$ } %<blk-com&!com-semi&com-blank> { " " * write$ } { output.state after.block = { add.period$ write$ newline$ %<!html> "\newblock " write$ } { output.state before.all = 'write$ { add.period$ " " * write$ } if$ } if$ mid.sentence 'output.state := } if$ s } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`output'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {output} { duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ 'output.nonnull if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`output.check'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {output.check} { 't := duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } 'output.nonnull if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`fin.entry'} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add annotation} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: make ``babel compatible''} % I have often been asked to add an annotation function. This suggestion is % from Soren Dayton; it inputs a file with the same name as the cite key, or % uses the text in the \texttt{annote} field. It will only work with \LaTeXe. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {fin.entry} %<*!fin-bare> { add.period$ write$ %</!fin-bare> %<*fin-bare> { duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ 'write$ if$ %</fin-bare> %<html&htdes> "</dd>" write$ %<html&!htdes&htlist> "</li>" write$ %<html&!htdes&!htlist> "" write$ newline$ %<*annote> %<*!html> annote missing$ { "\bibAnnoteFile{" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$ } { "\bibAnnote{" cite$ * "}{" * annote * "}" * write$ newline$ } if$ %</!html> %<*html> "<blockquote>Key: " cite$ * write$ annote missing$ { newline$ } { " Annotation:" write$ newline$ annote write$ newline$ } if$ "</blockquote>" write$ newline$ %</html> %</annote> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.block'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {new.block} { output.state before.all = 'skip$ { after.block 'output.state := } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.sentence'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {new.sentence} { output.state after.block = 'skip$ { output.state before.all = 'skip$ { after.sentence 'output.state := } if$ } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`add.blank'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 10}{Add function} % When text is printed with \texttt{output} or % \texttt{output.check}, the \texttt{output.state} is set such that % a comma will precede the next output text. For special effects, we want to % suppress this comma, inserting a blank instead. Hence the % \texttt{output.state} is changed to \texttt{before.all}, meaning no % punctuation is to be inserted. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {add.blank} { " " * before.all 'output.state := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`add.colon'} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add macro} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Simplify: just tack on colon} % \begin{macrocode} %<*au-col|tit-col> FUNCTION {add.colon} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { ":" * add.blank } if$ } %</au-col|tit-col> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`no.blank.or.punct'} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add function} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 30}{Present only for option \texttt{yrpp-xsp}} % Another frill is to suppresss both blanks and punctuation. The |\hspace| % permits a line break at this point. % \begin{macrocode} %<*yrpp-xsp> FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct} %<*!html> { "\hspace{0pt}" * before.all 'output.state := } %</!html> %<html>{ before.all 'output.state := } %</yrpp-xsp> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`date.block'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 9}{Add function} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 25}{Add option \texttt{yrp-per}} % The \texttt{date.block} function is used for special punctuating effects % after the date. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {date.block} { %<*!yrp-x> %<yrp-col> ":" * %<*!yrp-col> %<yrp-semi> ";" * %<*!yrp-semi> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&!yrp-per> skip$ %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&yrp-per> new.sentence %</!yrp-semi> %</!yrp-col> %</!yrp-x> %<*yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi> %<!yrpp-xsp> add.blank %<yrpp-xsp> no.blank.or.punct %</yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`not'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {not} { { #0 } { #1 } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`and'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {and} { 'skip$ { pop$ #0 } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`or'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {or} { { pop$ #1 } 'skip$ if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`non.stop'} % \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 8}{Add to test if last character % is punctuation: . ! ?} % This function (my invention) tests if the last character in the string % on the stack is \texttt{. ! ?} by using \texttt{add.period\$}. It is to % be used for conditional italic correction or adding commas. % \begin{macrocode} %<*!tit-it&tit-qq> FUNCTION {non.stop} { duplicate$ "}" * add.period$ #-1 #1 substring$ "." = } %</!tit-it&tit-qq> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`remove.dots'} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 8}{Add macro} % This macro removes any periods from the string on the stack. To be used % for undotting journal names, months, and juniors. Previously % \texttt{purify\$} was used for this, but that removes more than just % dots. % \begin{macrocode} %<*nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper> STRINGS {z} FUNCTION {remove.dots} { 'z := "" { z empty$ not } { z #1 #1 substring$ z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z := duplicate$ "." = 'pop$ { * } if$ } while$ } %</nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.block.checka'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> FUNCTION {new.block.checka} { empty$ 'skip$ 'new.block if$ } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.block.checkb'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} { empty$ swap$ empty$ and 'skip$ 'new.block if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checka'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} { empty$ 'skip$ 'new.sentence if$ } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checkb'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} { empty$ swap$ empty$ and 'skip$ 'new.sentence if$ } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`field.or.null'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {field.or.null} { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } 'skip$ if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`emphasize'} % Emphasis can be either italic or the alternating font. The font command % may be NFSS or regular \LaTeX~2.09 declarations. %\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Add \texttt{nfss} option} %\changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Add \texttt{em-ul} option} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {emphasize} %<*!em-x> { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<html> { "" swap$ * "" * } %<*!html> %<em-ul> { "\uline{" swap$ * "}" * } %<*!em-ul> %<*!nfss> %<!em-it> { "{\em " swap$ * "\/}" * } %<em-it> { "{\it " swap$ * "\/}" * } %</!nfss> %<*nfss> %<!em-it> { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * } %<em-it> { "\textit{" swap$ * "}" * } %</nfss> %</!em-ul> %</!html> if$ } %</!em-x> %<em-x>{ skip$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`bolden'} % The bold font command may be NFSS or the regular \LaTeX~2.09 declaration. %\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Add \texttt{nfss} option} % \begin{macrocode} %<*nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf> FUNCTION {bolden} { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<html> { "" swap$ * "" * } %<*!html> %<!nfss> { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } %<nfss> { "\textbf{" swap$ * "}" * } %</!html> if$ } %</nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`scaps'} % To put text into small caps. %\changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Add function} % \begin{macrocode} %<*lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc> FUNCTION {scaps} { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<html> { skip$ } %<*!html> %<!nfss> { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * } %<nfss> { "\textsc{" swap$ * "}" * } %</!html> if$ } %</lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`roman.list'} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add function} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Remove function} % \begin{macro}{`roman.cite'} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 16}{Add function} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Remove function} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`bib.name.font'} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro} % \begin{macro}{`bib.fname.font'} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro} % \begin{macro}{`cite.name.font'} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro} % Define functions for formatting the author/editor names, one for the % surnames (\texttt{bib.name.font}) and one for the first names % (\texttt{bib.fname.font}). These could be identical, or the latter is % deactivated if first names are not to be formatted, only the last names. % % For citations, we have \texttt{cite.name.font}. Here only surnames appear. % % It is also possible to have a user-defined font command for each, which the % user must define in his work. These are |\bibnamefont{}| and |\bibfnamefont{}|, % and some defaults are provided that simply repeat the arguments. Two commands % are needed if \texttt{nmft-def} and \texttt{fnm-def} are both given. % % If neither \texttt{fnm-def} nor \texttt{fnm-rm} are given, then the first names % are formatted the same as the surnames. % \begin{macrocode} %<*nmft> FUNCTION {bib.name.font} %<nmft-it>{ emphasize } %<!nmft-it&nmft-bf>{ bolden } %<!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&nmft-sc>{ scaps } %<*!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def> { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<!html> { "\bibnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * } %<html> { skip$ } if$ } %</!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def> FUNCTION {bib.fname.font} %<!fnm-rm&!fnm-def>{ bib.name.font } %<fnm-rm>{ skip$ } %<*!fnm-rm&fnm-def> { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<!html> { "\bibfnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * } %<html> { skip$ } if$ } %</!fnm-rm&fnm-def> %</nmft> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*lab> FUNCTION {cite.name.font} %<lab-it>{ emphasize } %<!lab-it&lab-bf>{ bolden } %<!lab-it&!lab-bf&lab-sc>{ scaps } %<*!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def> { duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } %<!html> { "\citenamefont{" swap$ * "}" * } %<html> { skip$ } if$ } %</!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def> %</lab> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`tie.or.space.prefix'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: replace \texttt{tie.or.space.connect} with % more flexible function} % The function \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} determines whether % the top item on the stack requires a tie character and % slips that (or a space character if not) ahead of it. % At this point a font switch or other function can be applied to % the top item on the stack, and the appropriate space found % just ahead of it on the stack. % % The sequence \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} \texttt{*} \texttt{*} is a common idiom % for joining the top two stack objects with a tie or space % depending on the length of the top object. % % Another idiom is to apply \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix}, apply a font switch, % and then swap and join. In this case the tie or space follows the object. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix} { duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < { "~" } { " " } if$ swap$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`capitalize'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 7}{Add capitalizing function} % Capitalizing is easy for regular languages, but for \texttt{babel}, % some trickery stuff is needed; definitions of |\capitalize| and % |\Capitalize| are written to the \texttt{.bbl} file. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {capitalize} %<!babel>{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ } %<babel>{ "\capitalize" swap$ * } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`space.word'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to space out words; necessary % for the multilingual functions.} % The function \texttt{space.word} adds a space before and after the word or % words currently on the stack. This was added for the \texttt{bbl.}$nnn$ % functions, that contain only a word without spacing, but replace explicit % text in the originals that were spaced out. Its seems more flexible to % define the word functions to be without spacing. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {space.word} { " " swap$ * " " * } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words. % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word. % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!exlang> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`bbl.xxx'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Replace all explicit words with functions % of the form \texttt{bbl.xxx}.} % \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 15}{Add option \texttt{varand}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{ednx}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Jun 9}{Make \texttt{\char`\\BIBand} protected} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add \texttt{bbl.eidpp}} % These are the default English words. There is no default language % option: one of \texttt{english} or \texttt{babel} must be given. % \begin{macrocode} %<*!babel> % The language selected here is ENGLISH FUNCTION {bbl.and} %<!varand|html>{ "and"} %<varand&!html>{ "\protect\BIBand{}"} FUNCTION {bbl.etal} { "et~al." } FUNCTION {bbl.editors} %<!ed>{ "editors" } %<ed>{ "eds." } FUNCTION {bbl.editor} %<!ed>{ "editor" } %<ed>{ "ed." } FUNCTION {bbl.edby} { "edited by" } FUNCTION {bbl.edition} %<!abr>{ "edition" } %<abr&!ednx>{ "edn." } %<abr&ednx>{ "ed." } FUNCTION {bbl.volume} %<!abr>{ "volume" } %<abr>{ "vol." } FUNCTION {bbl.of} { "of" } FUNCTION {bbl.number} %<!abr>{ "number" } %<abr>{ "no." } FUNCTION {bbl.nr} { "no." } FUNCTION {bbl.in} { "in" } FUNCTION {bbl.pages} %<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" } %<pp>{ "pp." } %<!pp&ppx>{ "" } FUNCTION {bbl.page} %<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" } %<pp>{ "p." } %<!pp&ppx>{ "" } %<*revdata> FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp} { "pages" } %</revdata> FUNCTION {bbl.chapter} %<!abr>{ "chapter" } %<abr>{ "chap." } FUNCTION {bbl.techrep} %<!abr>{ "Technical Report" } %<abr>{ "Tech. Rep." } FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis} { "Master's thesis" } FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis} { "Ph.D. thesis" } %<*!xedn> FUNCTION {bbl.first} %<!ord>{ "First" } %<ord>{ "1st" } FUNCTION {bbl.second} %<!ord>{ "Second" } %<ord>{ "2nd" } FUNCTION {bbl.third} %<!ord>{ "Third" } %<ord>{ "3rd" } FUNCTION {bbl.fourth} %<!ord>{ "Fourth" } %<ord>{ "4th" } FUNCTION {bbl.fifth} %<!ord>{ "Fifth" } %<ord>{ "5th" } FUNCTION {bbl.st} { "st" } FUNCTION {bbl.nd} { "nd" } FUNCTION {bbl.rd} { "rd" } FUNCTION {bbl.th} { "th" } %</!xedn> %<*!abr> MACRO {jan} {"January"} MACRO {feb} {"February"} MACRO {mar} {"March"} MACRO {apr} {"April"} MACRO {may} {"May"} MACRO {jun} {"June"} MACRO {jul} {"July"} MACRO {aug} {"August"} MACRO {sep} {"September"} MACRO {oct} {"October"} MACRO {nov} {"November"} MACRO {dec} {"December"} %</!abr> %<*abr> MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} MACRO {may} {"May"} MACRO {jun} {"Jun."} MACRO {jul} {"Jul."} MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} MACRO {sep} {"Sep."} MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} %</abr> %</!babel> % \end{macrocode} % % Here are the definitions for \texttt{babel} option, i.e., explicit % translations are not used, but rather only \LaTeX{} macros that must be % defined in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}. This could allow automatic % language selection. % \begin{macrocode} %<*babel> % The BABEL language selection is made here; definitions in babelbst.tex. FUNCTION {bbl.and} { "\bbland{}"} FUNCTION {bbl.etal} { "\bbletal{}"} FUNCTION {bbl.editors} %<!ed>{ "\bbleditors{}" } %<ed>{ "\bbleds{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.editor} %<!ed>{ "\bbleditor{}" } %<ed>{ "\bbled{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.edby} { "\bbledby{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.edition} %<!abr>{ "\bbledition{}" } %<abr>{ "\bbledn{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.volume} %<!abr>{ "\bblvolume{}" } %<abr>{ "\bblvol{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.of} { "\bblof{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.number} %<!abr>{ "\bblnumber{}" } %<abr>{ "\bblno{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.nr} { "\bblno{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.in} { "\bblin{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.pages} %<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpages{}" } %<pp>{ "\bblpp{}" } %<!pp&ppx>{ "" } FUNCTION {bbl.page} %<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpage{}" } %<pp>{ "\bblp{}" } %<!pp&ppx>{ "" } FUNCTION {bbl.chapter} %<!abr>{ "\bblchapter{}" } %<abr>{ "\bblchap{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.techrep} %<!abr>{ "\bbltechreport{}" } %<abr>{ "\bbltechrep{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis} { "\bblmthesis{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis} { "\bblphdthesis{}" } %<*revdata> FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp} { "\bbleidpp{}" } %</revdata> %<*!xedn> FUNCTION {bbl.first} %<!ord>{ "\bblfirst{}" } %<ord>{ "\bblfirsto{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.second} %<!ord>{ "\bblsecond{}" } %<ord>{ "\bblsecondo{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.third} %<!ord>{ "\bblthird{}" } %<ord>{ "\bblthirdo{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.fourth} %<!ord>{ "\bblfourth{}" } %<ord>{ "\bblfourtho{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.fifth} %<!ord>{ "\bblfifth{}" } %<ord>{ "\bblfiftho{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.st} { "\bblst{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.nd} { "\bblnd{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.rd} { "\bblrd{}" } FUNCTION {bbl.th} { "\bblth{}" } %</!xedn> MACRO {jan} {"\bbljan{}"} MACRO {feb} {"\bblfeb{}"} MACRO {mar} {"\bblmar{}"} MACRO {apr} {"\bblapr{}"} MACRO {may} {"\bblmay{}"} MACRO {jun} {"\bbljun{}"} MACRO {jul} {"\bbljul{}"} MACRO {aug} {"\bblaug{}"} MACRO {sep} {"\bblsep{}"} MACRO {oct} {"\bbloct{}"} MACRO {nov} {"\bblnov{}"} MACRO {dec} {"\bbldec{}"} %</babel> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`eng.ord'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to format English ordinals.} % This function adds English endings for ordinals 1, 2, 3. However, if % the second last digit is 1, then the ending is `th' for all last digits. % So far, all other languages included do not have this problem, and it is % sufficient to add the \textsl{th} equivalent. This might change with further % languages. % % This function must be included with \texttt{babel} too, since that includes % English. This means that the language definition files must also provide % for |\bblst|, |\bblnd|, and |\bblrd|, setting them all equal to |\bblth|. % % \begin{macrocode} %<*(english|!exlang)&!xedn> FUNCTION {eng.ord} { duplicate$ "1" swap$ * #-2 #1 substring$ "1" = { bbl.th * } { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ duplicate$ "1" = { pop$ bbl.st * } { duplicate$ "2" = { pop$ bbl.nd * } { "3" = { bbl.rd * } { bbl.th * } if$ } if$ } if$ } if$ } %</(english|!exlang)&!xedn> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!exlang> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!tail> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!head> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!jabr> MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} MACRO {ieeetcad} {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} %</!jabr> % \end{macrocode} % % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 8}{Revise journal abbreviations} % Journal abbreviations have been revised from the original Patashnik % ones with help of Conrado Badenas and the IUA recommendations. % \begin{macrocode} %<*jabr> MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."} MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} MACRO {ieeetcad} {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."} MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."} MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."} MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"} MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."} MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."} %</jabr> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.check'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: % add functions \texttt{bibinfo.check}, \texttt{bibinfo.warn}, % and \texttt{format.eprint}} % Define functions that encapsulate the argument % in a \TeX\ macro that allows for further processing when the % bibliography is processed, or allows for a separate computer % program to parse the |\bibitem| contents. % % The following table summarizes how each of the \btx{} entries % is accessed for output; these are the points where % the \texttt{format.bibinfo} or \texttt{bibinfo.check} functions % are called. % \subsubsection*{Trapped via \texttt{format.bibinfo}} % \begin{description} % \item[ \texttt{author} ]\texttt{format.names} % \item[ \texttt{collaboration} ]\texttt{format.authors} % \item[ \texttt{doi} ]\texttt{format.doi} % \item[ \texttt{editor} ]\texttt{format.editors} (\texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{format.names.ed} (\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}) % \item[ \texttt{eid} ]\texttt{format.journal.eid} (\texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, article) checks the output from \texttt{format.journal.pages} % \item[ \texttt{isbn} ]\texttt{format.isbn} % \item[ \texttt{issn} ]\texttt{format.issn} % \item[ \texttt{journal} ]\texttt{format.article.crossref}, article % \item[ \texttt{numpages} ]\texttt{format.journal.eid} % \item[ \texttt{organization} ]\texttt{format.organization.address} (\texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{manual} % \item[ \texttt{pages} ]\texttt{format.book}.pages (\texttt{book}, \texttt{booklet}), \texttt{format.pages} (\texttt{format.journal.pages}, \texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{article}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings}) % \item[ \texttt{publisher} ]\texttt{format.publisher.address} (like \texttt{output.check}, \texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings}) % \item[ \texttt{title} ]\texttt{format.title}, \texttt{format.btitle}, \texttt{misc}, \texttt{presort}, \texttt{bib.sort.order} % \item[ \texttt{volume} ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.book.crossref} % \item[ \texttt{year} ]in optional argument of \texttt{\char`\\bibitem}, \texttt{format.date} (as part of date), \texttt{format.year}, \texttt{format.org.or.pub} % \item[ \texttt{booktitle} ]\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle} (\texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings}), \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref} % \item[ \texttt{howpublished} ]\texttt{booklet}, \texttt{misc} % \item[ \texttt{edition} ]\texttt{convert.edition.format.edition} % \item[ \texttt{institution} ]\texttt{techreport} % \item[ \texttt{school} ]\texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis} % \item[ \texttt{address} ]\texttt{format.org.or.pub}, \texttt{booklet}, \texttt{manual}, \texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}, \texttt{techreport} % \item[ \texttt{chapter} ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages} % \item[ \texttt{number} ]\texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.tr.number} % \item[ \texttt{series} ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.book.crossref} % \item[ \texttt{type} ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{format.thesis.type}, \texttt{format.tr.number} % \item[ \texttt{month} ]\texttt{format.date} % \item[ \texttt{note} ]\texttt{format.note} % \item[ \texttt{annote} ]\texttt{fin.entry} % \end{description} % % \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\url}} % \begin{description} % \item[ \texttt{url} ]\texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\harvardurl}, \texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.note} (\texttt{\char`\\url}) % \end{description} % % \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\eprint}} % \begin{description} % \item[ \texttt{eprint} ]\texttt{format.eprint} % \item[ \texttt{archive} ]\texttt{format.eprint} % \end{description} % % \subsubsection*{Not encapsulated:} % \begin{description} % \item[ \texttt{key} ]cite key % \item[ \texttt{language} ]operand of \texttt{\char`\\selectlanguage} % \end{description} % % \subsubsection*{\texttt{bibinfo} tag, but not a \btx{} field} % \begin{description} % \item[ \texttt{date} ]\texttt{format.date} % \end{description} % % Provides robust access to fields, checking against \texttt{missing\$} % and \texttt{empty\$}. A \dtx{} option allows giving % a warning if either is the case. % % If not, it encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\bibinfo|. % The encapsulation is enabled by the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option: % if turned off, it simply pops the unneeded object. % % \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field} % % \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty} % Side effect: warning. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {bibinfo.check} { swap$ duplicate$ missing$ { %<bibinfo.warning> swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$ %<!bibinfo.warning> pop$ pop$ "" } { duplicate$ empty$ { %<bibinfo.warning> swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ %<!bibinfo.warning> swap$ pop$ } { swap$ %<bibinfo> "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" * %<!bibinfo> pop$ } if$ } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.warn'} % Replaces \texttt{output.check} % with \texttt{bibinfo.warn} followed by \texttt{output}. % % \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field} % % \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty} % % Side effect: warning if the field is empty. % Note: if the \dtx{} option \texttt{bibinfo} is not in effect, % then no encapsulation is done. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn} { swap$ duplicate$ missing$ { swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$ "" } { duplicate$ empty$ { swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } { swap$ %<bibinfo> "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" * %<!bibinfo> pop$ } if$ } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.eprint'} % \changes{4.00}{2000 Jan 21}{Add optional archive field} % The access function for the \texttt{eprint} field. % % If the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option is selected, then this function % encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\eprint|. % % \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-URL} % \begin{macrocode} %<*eprint> FUNCTION {format.eprint} { eprint duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "\eprint" archive empty$ 'skip$ { "[" * archive * "]" * } if$ "{" * swap$ * "}" * } if$ } %</eprint> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`write.url'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{write.url} for option % \texttt{harnm}} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Apply to non-Harvard styles} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Fix bug when both harnm and url-nl given} % This function taken over from \texttt{agsm.sty}, the main \texttt{harvard} % bib style. For non-Harvard styles that want to add the URL on a new line % after the reference, use this function too, but defined slightly % differently. % \begin{macrocode} %<*(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> FUNCTION {write.url} %<*!html> { url empty$ { skip$ } %<harnm> { "\newline\harvardurl{" url * "}" * write$ newline$ } %<!harnm&url-nl> { "\newline\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * write$ newline$ } if$ } %</!html> %<*html> { url empty$ { skip$ } { " <a href=" quote$ * url * quote$ * ">" * url * "</a>" * write$ newline$ } if$ } %</html> %</(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.url'} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 22}{Add function for regular URLs} % A non-harvard version of URL is also made for regular styles. % This is used only if the URL text is added as a regular item to the % reference information, blocked if necessary. Alternatives are on a new line % (Harvard-like) or in the note. % \begin{macrocode} %<*(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata> FUNCTION {format.url} { url empty$ { "" } %<!html> { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * } %<html> { "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$ %<html> * ">" * url * "</a>" * } if$ } %</(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`check.speaker'} % \changes{4.15}{2006 Jan 4}{Add \texttt{presentation}, which needs this function % to highlight speaker name} % The \texttt{presentation} type uses the \texttt{key} entry to indicate which % author is the speaker, as the sequence number in the author list. The speaker's % name is put into a different font, depending on the extra option. If no font % is specified, all names are the same. % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } %<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> FUNCTION {check.speaker} { key empty$ 'skip$ { key nameptr int.to.str$ = { %<pres-bf> bolden %<pres-it&!pres-bf> emphasize %<pres-sc&!pres-it&!pres-bf> scaps } 'skip$ if$ } if$ } %</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \begin{macro}{`format.names'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{harvard} command for `and' with % new option \texttt{harnm}} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Add option \texttt{nm-revf}} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvx}} % \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 7}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvv}} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Jr to go at end with \texttt{nm-rev1} (AGU style)} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Add option \texttt{nmand-rm}} % \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 30}{Add option \texttt{etal-rm}} % \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Add option \texttt{aunm-semi}} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Add option \texttt{nm-revv1} (AGU style with full % names)} % \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font; allow first names different} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{aunm-sl}} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others'' % from last format function} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate author name for later processing; % trap empty author list; % bring common braces to outer level for easier understanding of code.} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 7}{Add option \texttt{jnrlst} to put Jr. last} % \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvcx}} % \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvvc}} % \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{Add option \texttt{etal-xc}} % The \texttt{harvard} package now (version 2.0.3, for \LaTeXe) uses % |\harvardand| in place of the word \textsl{and} so that it can be changed % at run time. This is allowed for with the option \texttt{harnm}, which % need not be used only with the \texttt{har} option. % This seems like a useless feature for \texttt{.bst} files made from % this multilanguage source. However, it is included anyway, which means % if \texttt{harnm} option selected, one must redefine |\harvardand| % in the document for the language being used. % % The location of the junior part for reversed name is not obvious. Prior % to version 4.0, I always had it attached to the last name, as % Smith, Jr, John, put it probably is better as Smith, John, Jr. For the % AGU \texttt{nm-rev1} I always did it this way, probably because I had a % good AGU example to follow. Dilemma: do I just change them all or add an % option to do it? The option will maintain consistency with older % versions, but this could also be considered a bug fix rather than a new % feature. Solution: use the option, since I have found other \texttt{.bst} % files from Beebe and Harvard that put junior between surname and first % name. % % |bibinfo| is a variable used to store a string telling it whether the % names being formatted are authors or editors, since this function is called % for both purposes. Every call to this function must push the string onto the stack % just before the call. % \begin{macrocode} STRINGS { bibinfo} % \end{macrocode} % % Stack note: if the names argument is a non-nil list, this function returns % one object on the stack, the formatted list of names. % % \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.names} { 'bibinfo := duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { 's := "" 't := #1 'nameptr := s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames 'namesleft := { namesleft #0 > } { s nameptr % \end{macrocode} % Here is the author formatting when the names are not set in any special % font, or when the entire name set in a single special font. % \begin{macrocode} %<*!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> %<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> %<nm-init> "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" %<*!nm-init> %<nm-rev&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" %<nm-rev&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}" %<*!nm-rev> %<nm-rv&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{~}}" %<nm-rv&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{~}}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rv> %<nm-rvx&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{}}" %<nm-rvx&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{}}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rvx> %<nm-rvcx&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{}}" %<nm-rvcx&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f{}}{, jj}" %<*!nm-rvcx> %<nm-rvv&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{.}.}" %<nm-rvv&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{.}.}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rvv> %<nm-rvvc&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{.}.}" %<nm-rvvc&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f{.}.}{, jj}" %<*!nm-rvvc> %<nm-revf&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" %<nm-revf&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}" %<*!nm-revf> "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" %</!nm-revf> %</!nm-rvvc> %</!nm-rvv> %</!nm-rvcx> %</!nm-rvx> %</!nm-rv> %</!nm-rev> %</!nm-init> %</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> %<*nm-rev1> duplicate$ #1 > { "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" } %<!jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" } %<jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}" } if$ %</nm-rev1> %<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> duplicate$ #1 > { "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" } %<!jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" } %<jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}" } if$ %</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> format.name$ %<nm-rv|nm-rvx> remove.dots %<nmft&nmand-rm> bib.name.font %</!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> % \end{macrocode} % Here is the author formatting when the first and last names are % set in (possibly different) special fonts. % % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 7}{Junior part always in first name font} % The junior part is optionally between the reversed names, or after them. % \begin{macrocode} %<*nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> %<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> %<*nm-init> "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-init> %<*!nm-init> %<*nm-rev> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f.}" %<jnrlst> "{f.}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rev> %<*!nm-rev> %<*nm-rv> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{~}}" %<jnrlst> "{f{~}}{ jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rv> %<*!nm-rv> %<*nm-rvx> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{}}" %<jnrlst> "{f{}}{ jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvx> %<*!nm-rvx> %<*nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f{}}" %<jnrlst> "{f{}}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { remove.dots bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvcx> %<*!nm-rvcx> %<*nm-rvv> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{.}.}" %<jnrlst> "{f{.}.}{ jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvv> %<*!nm-rvv> %<*nm-rvvc> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f{.}.}" %<jnrlst> "{f{.}.}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvvc> %<*!nm-rvvc> %<*nm-revf> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{ff}" %<jnrlst> "{ff}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-revf> %<*!nm-revf> "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</!nm-revf> %</!nm-rvvc> %</!nm-rvv> %</!nm-rvcx> %</!nm-rvx> %</!nm-rv> %</!nm-rev> %</!nm-init> %</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> %<*nm-rev1> nameptr #1 > { "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ } { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f.}" %<jnrlst> "{f.}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ } if$ %</nm-rev1> %<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> nameptr #1 > { "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ } { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font s nameptr %<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{ff}" %<jnrlst> "{ff}{, jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ } if$ %</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> * %</nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bibinfo bibinfo.check %<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> type$ "presentation" = { check.speaker } 'skip$ if$ %</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> 't := nameptr #1 > { %<*nmlm> %<m1> nameptr #1 %<m2> nameptr #2 %<m3> nameptr #3 %<m4> nameptr #4 %<m5> nameptr #5 %<m6> nameptr #6 %<m7> nameptr #7 %<m8> nameptr #8 %<m9> nameptr #9 %<m0> nameptr #0 %<m10> #10 + %<m20> #20 + %<m30> #30 + %<m40> #40 + %<m50> #50 + %<m60> #60 + %<m70> #70 + %<m80> #80 + %<m90> #90 + #1 + = %<x1> numnames #1 %<x2> numnames #2 %<x3> numnames #3 %<x4> numnames #4 %<x5> numnames #5 %<x6> numnames #6 %<x7> numnames #7 %<x8> numnames #8 %<x9> numnames #9 %<x0> numnames #0 %<x10> #10 + %<x20> #20 + %<x30> #30 + %<x40> #40 + %<x50> #50 + %<x60> #60 + %<x70> #70 + %<x80> #80 + %<x90> #90 + > and { "others" 't := #1 'namesleft := } 'skip$ if$ %</nmlm> namesleft #1 > %<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { ", " * t * } %<aunm-semi> { "; " * t * } %<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/ " * t * } { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = { 't := } { pop$ } if$ %<(and-com|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> "," * %<(and-com|xand)&aunm-semi> ";" * %<(and-com|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> "/" * %<*!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand> numnames #2 > %<etal-xc> t "others" = not and %<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { "," * } %<aunm-semi> { ";" * } %<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/" * } 'skip$ if$ %</!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand> t "others" = { %<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font * %<!(nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font } %<*!xand> { %<*!harnm> %<!amper> bbl.and %<amper> "\&" %</!harnm> %<harnm> "\harvardand{}" %<nmft&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bib.name.font space.word * t * } %</!xand> %<xand> { " " * t * } if$ } if$ } 't if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ %<*nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> t "others" = 'skip$ { bib.name.font } if$ %</nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.names.ed'} % \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Add option \texttt{ed-rev} to allow editor % to be formatted just like authors'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Option \texttt{nm-revf} to act just as default} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{and-com-ed} to replace % \texttt{and-com} for collection editors} % \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font; allow first names different} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{ed-au}, synonomous with % \texttt{ed-rev}} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Mar 18}{Bug fix: \texttt{and-com-ed} used correctly} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate editor for later processing; % trap empty editor list} % When editors are used in place of authors to identify the work, the % names are always formatted just like authors'. However, in collections, % where ``edited by'' or ``\emph{names} (editors)'' are given, it is % normal not to reverse the names, even if the authors' are. The option % \texttt{ed-rev} sees to it that editor names are always formatted exactly % like those of authors, being reversed if necessary. % % The option \texttt{ed-au} is identical to \texttt{ed-rev}, but is more % logical. It means editors (in incollections) are formatted exactly like % authors, with all the font, reversing, and number limitations. This is % selected automatically with \texttt{nm-init} and \texttt{nm-} default to save % programming memory. % % The option \texttt{nm-revf} in this case acts the same as the default % when no \texttt{nm-} option given: full names with surname last. Therefore % it is not necessary to test for it at all, since it, like the default, % has the lowest priority: any other \texttt{nm-} option clobbers it. % % The options \texttt{aunm-semi} and \texttt{aunm-sl} will put a semi-colon or % slash between editor names, just as for authors, when \texttt{ed-rev} not % selected, in keeping with the idea that in this case both authors and editors % are to be formatted the same. % % This function either dispatches to \texttt{format.names} or executes code % which is similar. In the latter case, names are always presented first % followed by surname (``last name''); name limit processing (\texttt{nmlm}) is not executed; % and endgame processing differs in being qualified by \texttt{nmfted}. % % Stack note: if the names (second) argument is a non-nil list, this function returns % with one object on the stack, the formatted list of names. % % \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.names.ed} { %<ed-rev|ed-au> format.names %<*!ed-rev&!ed-au> 'bibinfo := duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { 's := "" 't := #1 'nameptr := s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames 'namesleft := { namesleft #0 > } { s nameptr % \end{macrocode} % Editor name is handled as a single object, with no separation of first and last name. % \begin{macrocode} %<*!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> %<nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" %<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> %<nm-revv1> "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" %<*!nm-revv1> %<nm-rv> "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rv> %<nm-rvx> "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rvx> %<nm-rvcx> "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rvcx> %<nm-rvv|nm-rvvc> "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" %<*!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc> "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" %</!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc> %</!nm-rvcx> %</!nm-rvx> %</!nm-rv> %</!nm-revv1> %</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> format.name$ %<nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> remove.dots %<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font %</!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> % \end{macrocode} % Editor first and last name handled separately. % \begin{macrocode} %<*(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> %<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> %<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> %<*nm-revv1> "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-revv1> %<*!nm-revv1> %<*nm-rv> "{f{~}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rv> %<*!nm-rv> %<*nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{f{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> %<*!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> %<*nm-rvv> "{f{.}.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } if$ %</nm-rvv> %<*!nm-rvv> "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } if$ s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * s nameptr "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } if$ %</!nm-rvv> %</!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> %</!nm-rv> %</!nm-revv1> %</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> * %</(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> bibinfo bibinfo.check 't := nameptr #1 > { namesleft #1 > %<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { ", " * t * } %<aunm-semi> { "; " * t * } %<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/ " * t * } { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = { 't := } { pop$ } if$ %<(and-com-ed|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> "," * %<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-semi> ";" * %<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> "/" * %<*!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand> numnames #2 > %<etal-xc> t "others" = not and %<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { "," * } %<aunm-semi> { ";" * } %<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/" * } 'skip$ if$ %</!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand> t "others" = { %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font * %<!(nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font } %<*!xand> { %<*!harnm> %<!amper> bbl.and %<amper> "\&" %</!harnm> %<harnm> "\harvardand{}" %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bib.name.font space.word * t * } %</!xand> %<xand> { " " * t * } if$ } if$ } 't if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ %<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> t "others" = 'skip$ { bib.name.font } if$ %</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> } if$ %</!ed-rev&!ed-au> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.key'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> FUNCTION {format.key} { empty$ { key field.or.null } { "" } if$ } %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.authors'} % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: Add code to emit collaboration.} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.authors} { author "author" format.names %<*revdata> duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { " (" swap$ * ")" * } if$ * } if$ %</revdata> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`get.bbl.editor'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: access function for editor text entity} % Use this function universally when accessing the ``editor'' text entity. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor} { editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.editors'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{edpar}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add option \texttt{edparc}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate editors for further processing.} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 6}{Add option \texttt{edparxc}} % The option \texttt{edpar} puts the word `editor' in parentheses. % In \texttt{genbst.mbs}, this occurred automatically with the option % \texttt{ed}, to abbreviate `editor' to `ed'. In \texttt{babel.mbs}, % this was not the case, because of complications with the word functions. % Now this possibility is added as a special option, which means there is % some inconsistency with older \texttt{.dbj} files that called \texttt{ed}: % the abbreviated `ed' is not put in parentheses unless \texttt{edpar} is % also called. % % Note that the code here is very similar to code in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}; % the two should be kept coordinated. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.editors} { editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!edpar&!edparxc> "," * " " * get.bbl.editor %<bkedcap> capitalize %<edpar|edparc|edparxc> "(" swap$ * ")" * * } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.in.editors'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{edpar}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add option \texttt{edparc}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: code subsumed into % \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}} % See the note about the option \texttt{edpar} above. % % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.book.pages'} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add function} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.} % \begin{macrocode} %<*pg-bk> FUNCTION {format.book.pages} { pages "pages" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { " " * bbl.pages * } if$ } %</pg-bk> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.isbn'} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add function} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate isbn for further processing} % \begin{macrocode} %<*isbn> FUNCTION {format.isbn} { isbn "isbn" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block "ISBN " swap$ * } if$ } %</isbn> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.issn'} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add function} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate issn for further processing} % \begin{macrocode} %<*issn> FUNCTION {format.issn} { issn "issn" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block "ISSN " swap$ * } if$ } %</issn> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.doi'} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add function} % \begin{macrocode} %<*doi> FUNCTION {format.doi} { doi "doi" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<!html> "\doi{" swap$ * "}" * %<html> "doi:" swap$ * } if$ } %</doi> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`select.language'} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add function} % The \texttt{language} field code has been provided by Bernd Feige, of the % University of Freiburg. % \begin{macrocode} %<*lang> FUNCTION {select.language} { duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { language empty$ 'skip$ { "{\selectlanguage{" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * } if$ } if$ } %</lang> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.note'} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Apr 25}{Add macro} % \changes{3.83}{1997 May 26}{Fix so unmatched brace warning suppressed} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add option \texttt{url-nt}} % Notes should be entered as though they were a sentence on their own. % However, if they appear mid-sentence rather than after a block or sentence, % the first letter must be lowercase. Thus if a note begins with a proper % noun, it must be in braces. To avoid a warning about unmatched braces % with the \texttt{change.case\$} function, check first if the leading % character is an opening brace. % % With options \texttt{url,url-nt}, the URL text is treated as a note, and % added here. It is output directly, not prepended to the note text. This % means, if the note is to be a new sentence, the URL text starts that % sentence, and the regular note is added to that sentence, comma between. % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate note for further processing} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Sep 14}{PWD: remove url with \texttt{revdata}} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.note} { %<*url-nt&!revdata> url empty$ 'skip$ %<!html> { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * output } %<html> { "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$ %<html> * ">" * url * "</a>" * output } if$ %</url-nt&!revdata> note empty$ { "" } { note #1 #1 substring$ duplicate$ "{" = 'skip$ { output.state mid.sentence = { "l" } { "u" } if$ change.case$ } if$ note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.title'} % \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Add enquote function to put titles in quotes, % such that punctuation is inside quotes.} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Apr 17}{Fix bug in quoted title and \texttt{blk-com}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add \texttt{qx} option, for comma outside % quotes} % For a quoted title, any punctuation in the title goes inside the quote. % Otherwise, the comma or period following the title also goes inside. % Exception is with \texttt{qx} option, in which case the comma goes % outside, even when punctuation present; for period (\texttt{!blk-com}) % is added outside only when punctuation is absent. % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate title for further processing.} % \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Put \texttt{change.case\$} before \texttt{bibinfo.check}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.title} { title %<*!atit-u> duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$ %</!atit-u> "title" bibinfo.check %<*tit-it|tit-qq|lang> duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<tit-it> emphasize %<*!tit-it&tit-qq> "\enquote{" swap$ * %<*!qx> %<*blk-com> non.stop %<!com-semi&!com-blank> { ",} " * } %<com-semi> { ";} " * } %<!com-semi&com-blank> { "} " * } { "} " * } if$ %</blk-com> %<!blk-com> add.period$ "}" * %</!qx> %<*qx> %<*blk-com> %<!com-semi&!com-blank> "}, " * %<com-semi> "}; " * %<!com-semi&com-blank> "} " * %</blk-com> %<!blk-com> "}" * %</qx> %</!tit-it&tit-qq> %<lang> select.language } if$ %</tit-it|tit-qq|lang> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`end.quote.title'} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Add macro to finish off quoted titles} % For a quoted title, the punctuation appears in the quotes. For commas % between block, this means the inter-block punctuation is already present, % so it must be suppressed after every \texttt{format.title output}. This % is done by setting the \texttt{output.state} to \texttt{before.all}, but % only if there really was a title. Call this macro every time after % titles are output. % \begin{macrocode} %<*blk-com&tit-qq> FUNCTION {end.quote.title} { title empty$ 'skip$ { before.all 'output.state := } if$ } %</blk-com&tit-qq> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`end.quote.btitle'} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 31}{Add function} % Similar to |end.quote.title| except that it is only applied if titles of % proceedings and collections are quoted, and if % neither \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, nor \texttt{edby-par} are selected % (this is the default case in the relevant menu of the \texttt{makebst.tex} run). % These options add text after the booktitle, % so additional punctuation need not be suppressed. Unless there is no editor! % % Note: this function is called after the result of \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle} % has been output, and attempts to predict what that output had been. % Would it not be better to call this function while that result is still % on the stack? % \begin{macrocode} %<*bt-qq> FUNCTION {end.quote.btitle} { booktitle empty$ 'skip$ %<!edby&!edby-par&!edby-parc> { before.all 'output.state := } %<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc> { editor empty$ { before.all 'output.state := } 'skip$ if$ } %</edby|edby-par|edby-parc> if$ } %</bt-qq> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`make.full.names'} % \changes{1.1}{1993 Nov 12}{Add key labels to \texttt{calc.long.label} and % get {\tt'author} and {\tt'editor} in right order when author % missing.} % \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Remove \texttt{calc.long.label} and % \texttt{format.long.lab.names}, replacing them with % \texttt{format.full.names}, \texttt{make.full.names}, and adding % \texttt{author.editor.key}, \texttt{author.key}, and \texttt{editor.key}} % \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Remove option \texttt{and-com} from % \texttt{make.full.names}} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Add full names for \texttt{natbib} v5.3} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Suppress `and' in full list if suppressed in short} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Font of `and' in lists same as in citations} % \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Fix location of \texttt{and-xcom} code} % In versions before 2.2, there were two functions \texttt{calc.long.label} % and \texttt{format.long.lab.names} that made up the string % \texttt{long.label} for each entry. This contains the full author list. % However, there was a bug in the one routine, entered by mistake when an % earlier bug was removed, and more seriously, the string % \texttt{long.label} was limited to \texttt{entry.max\$} characters, 100 on % my system. Author lists were truncated. Thus, \texttt{make.full.names} % is used instead to enter the full list of names directly in the % \texttt{output.bibitem} function, without an intermediate string. This % involves changing the order of some function definitions, especially % \texttt{output.bibitem} must come later. % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others'' % from last format function} % \changes{3.98}{1999 May 28}{Fix bug with \texttt{harnm}, missing brace} % \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{Format juniors to be same as for \texttt{format.lab.names}} % \begin{macrocode} %<*har|cay|nat> FUNCTION {format.full.names} {'s := "" 't := #1 'nameptr := s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames 'namesleft := { namesleft #0 > } { s nameptr %<!jnrlab> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<*jnrlab> %<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ %<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ %</jnrlab> %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font 't := nameptr #1 > { %<*nmlm> %<m1> nameptr #1 %<m2> nameptr #2 %<m3> nameptr #3 %<m4> nameptr #4 %<m5> nameptr #5 %<m6> nameptr #6 %<m7> nameptr #7 %<m8> nameptr #8 %<m9> nameptr #9 %<m0> nameptr #0 %<m10> #10 + %<m20> #20 + %<m30> #30 + %<m40> #40 + %<m50> #50 + %<m60> #60 + %<m70> #70 + %<m80> #80 + %<m90> #90 + #1 + = %<x1> numnames #1 %<x2> numnames #2 %<x3> numnames #3 %<x4> numnames #4 %<x5> numnames #5 %<x6> numnames #6 %<x7> numnames #7 %<x8> numnames #8 %<x9> numnames #9 %<x0> numnames #0 %<x10> #10 + %<x20> #20 + %<x30> #30 + %<x40> #40 + %<x50> #50 + %<x60> #60 + %<x70> #70 + %<x80> #80 + %<x90> #90 + > and { "others" 't := #1 'namesleft := } 'skip$ if$ %</nmlm> namesleft #1 > { ", " * t * } { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = { 't := } { pop$ } if$ t "others" = { %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * %<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font } { %<*!harnm> %<*!and-xcom> numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$ %</!and-xcom> %<!amper> bbl.and %<amper> "\&" %</!harnm> %<harnm> "\harvardand{}" space.word * t * } if$ } if$ } 't if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ %<*lab&!and-rm> t "others" = 'skip$ { cite.name.font } if$ %</lab&!and-rm> } FUNCTION {author.editor.key.full} { author empty$ { editor empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } 'key if$ } { editor format.full.names } if$ } { author format.full.names } if$ } FUNCTION {author.key.full} { author empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } 'key if$ } { author format.full.names } if$ } FUNCTION {editor.key.full} { editor empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } 'key if$ } { editor format.full.names } if$ } FUNCTION {make.full.names} { type$ "book" = type$ "inbook" = or 'author.editor.key.full { type$ "proceedings" = 'editor.key.full 'author.key.full if$ } if$ } %</har|cay|nat> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`output.bibitem'} %\changes{1.1}{1993 Nov 12}{Test for missing year, set to {\tt????}.} % The \texttt{output.bibitem} function formats the |\bibitem| entries. %\changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Move to later location, add % \texttt{make.full.names} instead of inserting string \texttt{long.label}} %\changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{nat} for full author list % for \texttt{natbib.sty} version~5.3} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Nov 18}{For \texttt{nat}, put label in braces} % A user has pointed out to me that if the label argument in square brackets % are put into braces (within the squares) it is then resistent to any % problems if square braces should appear within the label. Do this, but % only for the \texttt{nat} option. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {output.bibitem} { newline$ %<*!html> %<*ay> %<!har&!nat> "\bibitem[" write$ %<!har&nat> "\bibitem[{" write$ %<har> "\harvarditem" write$ %<nmd> "\protect\citeauthoryear{" write$ %<ast> "\protect\astroncite{" write$ %<cay> "\protect\citeauthoryear{" make.full.names * "}{" * write$ %<cn> "\protect\citename{" write$ %<!har> label write$ %<har> make.full.names duplicate$ label = %<har> 'skip$ %<har> { "[" label * "]" * write$ } %<har> if$ %<har> "{" swap$ * "}{" * write$ %<har> year duplicate$ empty$ %<cn> ", }" year duplicate$ empty$ %<cay|nmd|ast> "}{" year duplicate$ empty$ %<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&blkyear> { pop$ "" } %<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&!blkyear> { pop$ "????" } %<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast> 'skip$ %<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast> if$ %<har> extra.label * "}{" * write$ %<cn> * extra.label * "]{" * write$ %<cay|nmd|ast> * extra.label * "}]{" * write$ %<alk> "]{" write$ %<!(har|cay|nmd|ast|alk|cn|nat)> ")]{" write$ %<nat> ")" make.full.names duplicate$ short.list = %<nat> { pop$ } %<nat> { * } %<nat> if$ %<nat> "}]{" * write$ %</ay> %<!ay&!(cite|alph)> "\bibitem{" write$ %<!ay&(cite|alph)> "\bibitem[" label * "]{" * write$ cite$ write$ "}" write$ newline$ "" %</!html> %<*html> %<*htdes> "<dt><tt>" write$ cite$ write$ "</tt></dt>" write$ newline$ "<dd>" %</htdes> %<htlist&!htdes> "<li>" %<!htlist&!htdes> "" %</html> before.all 'output.state := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`if.digit'} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Add macro} % Add \texttt{if.digit} and \texttt{n.separate} to convert large page numbers % to a separated number. % \begin{macrocode} %<*pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> FUNCTION {if.digit} { duplicate$ "0" = swap$ duplicate$ "1" = swap$ duplicate$ "2" = swap$ duplicate$ "3" = swap$ duplicate$ "4" = swap$ duplicate$ "5" = swap$ duplicate$ "6" = swap$ duplicate$ "7" = swap$ duplicate$ "8" = swap$ "9" = or or or or or or or or or } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`n.separate'} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Add macro for options \texttt{pgsep-c}, % \texttt{pgsep-s}, \texttt{pgsep-p}} % Large page numbers are to be separated in threes, with thin space, comma % or period. The number must be 5 digits before the separation occurs. % No provision is made for numbers of 7 or more digits. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {n.separate} { 't := "" #0 'numnames := { t empty$ not } { t #-1 #1 substring$ if.digit { numnames #1 + 'numnames := } { #0 'numnames := } if$ t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ * t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't := numnames #5 = { duplicate$ #1 #2 substring$ swap$ #3 global.max$ substring$ %<pgsep-c> "," swap$ * * %<pgsep-p> "." swap$ * * %<pgsep-s&!html> "\," swap$ * * %<pgsep-s&html> " " swap$ * * } 'skip$ if$ } while$ } %</pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`n.dashify'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {n.dashify} { %<pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> n.separate 't := "" { t empty$ not } { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not { "--" * t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } { "-" * t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } while$ } if$ } { t #1 #1 substring$ * t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } if$ } while$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`word.in'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Function \texttt{word.in} constructed out of % \texttt{bbl.in} or \texttt{bbl.iin}.} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 16}{Use only \texttt{bbl.in} and capitalize it % as necessary; remove \texttt{bbl.iin}} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add option \texttt{in-x} to suppress `in'} % \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Add option \texttt{in-it} to italicize `in'} % The function \texttt{word.in} prints the word \textsl{in} for references % that are % contained in a larger work, or in conference proceedings. One may have a % colon after the word with the option \texttt{in-col}. If blocks of text are % to be separated with commas (option \texttt{blk-com}) then the word remains % in lower case, as it is defined in \texttt{bbl.in}; but if blocks act as % sentences, then it must be capitalized. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {word.in} %<in-x>{ "" } %<*!in-x> %<blk-com|blk-tita>{ bbl.in %<!blk-com&!blk-tita>{ bbl.in capitalize %<in-col> ":" * %<in-it> emphasize " " * } %</!in-x> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.date'} % \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 6}{Add option \texttt{yr-per} to put period % before date} % \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{harvard} bracket names to year % with new option \texttt{harnm}} % \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Add \texttt{yr-blk} for no punctuation before % the date} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add \texttt{dtrev} option for year month} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add \texttt{mth-bare} for dotless abbreviation % of months} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add \texttt{volp-dt} for date after volume} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Add brace pair after % \texttt{\char`\\harvardyearright}} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 16}{Add \texttt{aymth} option for months in dates} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Add \texttt{vnum-dt} option} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 12}{Add \texttt{yr-com} option} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 12}{Fix bug that left off extra label for plain year} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{volp-dt} with \texttt{jdt-p}} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{vnum-dt} with \texttt{jdt-vs}} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Add \texttt{jdt-v}} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 10}{Do \texttt{yr-blk} right} % \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Add \texttt{jdt-pc} to add comma after year} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{xmth} to suppress month for numericals} % \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{For \texttt{harnm}, suppress punctuation before date} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Add \texttt{blkyear} option} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate the date for further processing} % The new \texttt{harvard.sty} allows variable brackets around the date % in the reference list. It uses |\harvardyearleft| and |\harvardyearright| % in the \texttt{.bst} files. Allow this with the option \texttt{harnm}, % which could actually be used without the \texttt{har} option. Note that % this overrides the other year formatting options. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> FUNCTION {format.date} { year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ { %<*!blkyear> "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$ pop$ "????" %</!blkyear> } 'skip$ if$ %<*aymth> month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<dtrev> swap$ " " * swap$ } if$ * %<mth-bare> remove.dots %</aymth> %<dtbf> bolden extra.label * %<*!harnm> %<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per> before.all 'output.state := %<yr-par> " (" swap$ * ")" * %<!yr-par&yr-brk> " [" swap$ * "]" * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col> ": " swap$ * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com> ", " swap$ * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state := %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ * %</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per> %</!harnm> %<harnm> before.all 'output.state := %<harnm> " \harvardyearleft " swap$ * "\harvardyearright{}" * } %</ay> %<*!ay> FUNCTION {format.date} { %<!xmth> month "month" bibinfo.check %<xmth> "" duplicate$ empty$ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ { swap$ 'skip$ { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ } if$ * } { swap$ 'skip$ { %<showstack> month year %<!dtrev> swap$ " " * swap$ } if$ * %<mth-bare> remove.dots } if$ %<dtbf> bolden %<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk> duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { before.all 'output.state := %<yr-par> " (" swap$ * ")" * %<!yr-par&yr-brk> " [" swap$ * "]" * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col> ": " swap$ * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com> ", " swap$ * %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state := %<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ * } if$ %</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk> } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.year'} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Add function} % For the options that put the year into the journal specifications, use a % special formatter separate from the regular date formatter. % The year is always in parentheses (except for appended to journal name). % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate year for further processing} % \begin{macrocode} %<*jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs> FUNCTION{format.year} { year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ { "empty year in " cite$ * %<ay&!blkyear> "; set to ????" * warning$ %<ay&!blkyear> pop$ "????" } { %<!ay&jdt-vs> " (" swap$ * ")" * %<!ay&!jdt-vs> "(" swap$ * ")" * } if$ %<*ay> extra.label * %<jdt-vs> " (" swap$ * ")" * %<!jdt-vs> "(" swap$ * ")" * %</ay> } %</jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.btitle'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate title for further processing.} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.btitle} { title "title" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!btit-rm> emphasize %<lang> select.language } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`either.or.check'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {either.or.check} { empty$ 'pop$ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.bvolume'} % \changes{4.11}{2003 Jun 23}{Add \texttt{ser-vol}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.bvolume} { volume empty$ { "" } { bbl.volume volume tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ %<*!ser-vol> { swap$ bbl.of space.word * swap$ emphasize * } %</!ser-vol> %<ser-vol> { emphasize ", " * swap$ * } if$ "volume and number" number either.or.check } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.number.series'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.number.series} { volume empty$ { number empty$ { series field.or.null } %<*num-xser> { series empty$ { number "number" bibinfo.check } { output.state mid.sentence = { bbl.number } { bbl.number capitalize } if$ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * * bbl.in space.word * series "series" bibinfo.check * } if$ } %</num-xser> %<*!num-xser> { output.state mid.sentence = { bbl.number } { bbl.number capitalize } if$ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * * series empty$ { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } { bbl.in space.word * series "series" bibinfo.check * } if$ } %</!num-xser> if$ } { "" } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`is.num'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to test for digit.} % \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions} % This function takes the single-character string on the stack and returns % 1 if it is a digit, else 0. % \begin{macrocode} %<*!xedn> FUNCTION {is.num} { chr.to.int$ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`extract.num'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to extract leading number from % a literal string.} % \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions} % This function tests the string on the stack to see if it begins with a % number. If so, that number is left on the stack; if the string contains % no numbers at the start, it is left unchanged. The idea is to convert % \textsl{1st} to \textsl{1} and leave \textsl{first} as is. % This is used by {\tt convert.edition}. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {extract.num} { duplicate$ 't := "" 's := { t empty$ not } { t #1 #1 substring$ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := duplicate$ is.num { s swap$ * 's := } { pop$ "" 't := } if$ } while$ s empty$ 'skip$ { pop$ s } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`convert.edition'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to convert \texttt{edition} entry % text from word to a function} % \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: change calling sequence: arg on stack} % The function \texttt{convert.edition} takes the text in the field % \texttt{edition} and changes it to the language-specific equivalent. As % originally planned for \btx, this field should contain the words % \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc. Being so explicit, % it is not so easy to translate, nor to % convert to \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd}, etc., if one wanted. % This function carries out the translation, by changing % \textsl{first} or \textsl{1} to \texttt{bbl.first}, and so % on. The field is reduced to lower case to make it case insensitive. If no % translation is found, then the original text in \texttt{edition} is used % instead, as it stands. However, if the original is a number greater than % the maximum for which text is provided, then \texttt{bbl.th} is added to % it. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {convert.edition} { extract.num "l" change.case$ 's := s "first" = s "1" = or { bbl.first 't := } { s "second" = s "2" = or { bbl.second 't := } { s "third" = s "3" = or { bbl.third 't := } { s "fourth" = s "4" = or { bbl.fourth 't := } { s "fifth" = s "5" = or { bbl.fifth 't := } { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num %<!english&exlang> { s bbl.th * 't := } %<english|!exlang> { s eng.ord 't := } { edition 't := } if$ } if$ } if$ } if$ } if$ } if$ t } %</!xedn> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.edition'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add call to \texttt{convert.edition}} % This function formats the text for the edition specification, such as % ``Second edition''. It combines the edition number with the word % \textsl{edition}. % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate edition for further processing.} % \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Put \texttt{change.case\$} before \texttt{bibinfo.check}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.edition} { edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<!xedn> convert.edition output.state mid.sentence = { "l" } { "t" } if$ change.case$ "edition" bibinfo.check " " * bbl.edition * } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { multiresult } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`multi.page.check'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {multi.page.check} { 't := #0 'multiresult := { multiresult not t empty$ not and } { t #1 #1 substring$ duplicate$ "-" = swap$ duplicate$ "," = swap$ "+" = or or { #1 'multiresult := } { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } if$ } while$ multiresult } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.pages'} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 24}{Add option \texttt{bkpg-par}} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add option \texttt{bkpg-x}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Dec 10}{Add \texttt{!ppx} test to avoid extra space} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.pages} { pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { duplicate$ multi.page.check { %<!bkpg-x&!ppx> bbl.pages swap$ n.dashify } { %<!bkpg-x&!ppx> bbl.page swap$ } if$ %<!bkpg-x&!ppx> tie.or.space.prefix "pages" bibinfo.check %<!bkpg-x&!ppx> * * %<bkpg-par> "(" swap$ * ")" * } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`first.page'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*jpg-1> FUNCTION {first.page} { 't := "" { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } { t #1 #1 substring$ * t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } while$ } %</jpg-1> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.journal.pages'} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Remove from \texttt{format.vol.num.pages} to % be a separate function} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Remove option \texttt{vnum-pg}} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{volp-dt} with \texttt{jdt-p}} % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.} % % Note: this function gets called with something on the stack. % It may be the volume and number. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.journal.pages} { pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ pop$ format.pages } { %<volp-sp> ": " * %<*!volp-sp> %<volp-blk> " " * %<*!volp-blk> %<volp-com> ", " * %<*!volp-com> %<volp-semi> "; " * %<!volp-semi> ":" * %</!volp-com> %</!volp-blk> %</!volp-sp> %<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&jdt-p> format.year * " " * %<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&!jdt-p&jdt-pc> format.year * ", " * swap$ %<jpg-1> first.page %<!jpg-1> n.dashify %<*jwdpg> pages multi.page.check 'bbl.pages 'bbl.page if$ swap$ tie.or.space.prefix %</jwdpg> "pages" bibinfo.check %<jwdpg> * * * } if$ } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.journal.eid'} % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add function to emit the eid information.} % This function is called with something on the stack (journal vol, number) % and appends \texttt{eid} and \texttt{numpages} if those field are non-empty. % Very similar to \texttt{format.journal.pages}. % % For the AGU style of including the DOI as part of the EID, the DOI number % is appended too. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.journal.eid} { eid "eid" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<volp-sp> ": " * %<*!volp-sp> %<volp-blk> " " * %<*!volp-blk> %<volp-com> ", " * %<*!volp-com> %<volp-semi> "; " * %<!volp-semi> ":" * %</!volp-com> %</!volp-blk> %</!volp-sp> } if$ swap$ * %<*revdata> numpages empty$ 'skip$ { bbl.eidpp numpages tie.or.space.prefix "numpages" bibinfo.check * * " (" swap$ * ")" * * } if$ %</revdata> } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.vol.num.pages'} % \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 6}{Add option \texttt{volp-sp} to put space % after colon in vol:~page.} % \changes{1.5(2.3)c}{1995 Jan 20}{Add options \texttt{vnum-h}, % \texttt{vnum-nr} and \texttt{vnum-x} for various formats of % journal vol number} % \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Add options \texttt{vnum-sp} and % \texttt{vnum-cm}} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 17}{Add option \texttt{volp-semi}} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Put \texttt{bolden} in right place for % \texttt{vol-2bf} option} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Put date between volume and number} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Add possibilitity of `page' word} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Activate \texttt{jwdpg} option properly} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add possibilitity of `volume' word} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Add option \texttt{pp-last}} % Version 3.84, I have rationalized several options that placed the date in the % journal specifications. It was rather chaotic before, but now it should be % more systematic. This means some options have been removed, something that I % do not like to do. % % The option \texttt{pp-last} suppresses the pages in the formatting macros, and % sees to it that the pages are added just before any notes in those entries % that take pages. This applies to more than just \texttt{article}, but to % \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection} as well. % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate the volume and number for % further processing.} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} { volume field.or.null duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<jwdvol> bbl.volume swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check %<jwdvol> * * } if$ %<vol-bf&!vol-2bf> bolden %<!vol-bf&!vol-2bf&vol-it> emphasize %<jdt-v|jdt-vs> format.year * %<*!vnum-x> number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } 'skip$ if$ swap$ %<vnum-sp> "~(" swap$ * ")" * %<!vnum-sp&vnum-cm> ", " swap$ * %<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&vnum-nr> ", " bbl.nr * number tie.or.space.prefix pop$ * swap$ * %<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&vnum-h> ", \#" swap$ * %<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&vnum-b> " " swap$ * %<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&!vnum-b> "(" swap$ * ")" * } if$ * %<!vol-bf&vol-2bf> bolden %</!vnum-x> %<*!pp-last> eid empty$ { format.journal.pages } { format.journal.eid } if$ %</!pp-last> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.chapter.pages'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate series and chapter for % further processing.} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} { chapter empty$ %<!pp-last> 'format.pages %<pp-last> { "" } { type empty$ { bbl.chapter } { type "l" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check } if$ chapter tie.or.space.prefix "chapter" bibinfo.check * * %<*!pp-last> pages empty$ 'skip$ { ", " * format.pages * } if$ %</!pp-last> } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`bt.enquote'} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 31}{Add function} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: trap \texttt{empty\$} argument} % This is to place the booktitle for proceedings and collections into quotes. % If punctuation is to be included, then add a comma unless a stop already % exists, or add a period under the only circumstances that % |format.in.ed.booktitle| is followed by |new.sentence|. % \begin{macrocode} %<*bt-qq> FUNCTION {bt.enquote} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "\enquote{" swap$ * %<*!qx> non.stop { ",} " * } { "}, " * } if$ %</!qx> %<*qx> "}, " * %</qx> } if$ } %</bt-qq> % \end{macrocode} % % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.booktitle'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: new function} % The function \texttt{format.booktitle} pushes one object % (the book title, suitably encapsulated) onto the stack. % It is currently used in \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref} % and in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}, and should be used whenever accessing % the \texttt{booktitle} field for eventual output. % % If the book title is empty or missing, the function pushes an empty string. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.booktitle} { booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check %<!bt-qq&!bt-rm> emphasize %<bt-qq> bt.enquote } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.in.ed.booktitle'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Add option \texttt{edby-par} to put editors % in parentheses} % \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{If \texttt{ed} and \texttt{edby} given % together, abbreviate `edited by' to `ed(s).'} % \changes{3.1}{1995 May 2}{Add option \texttt{edbyx} to replace `edited by' % by `ed(s).'} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Add option \texttt{edcap}} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 10}{Fix bug that added extra space sometimes} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Book titles may also be roman} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{New options \texttt{edby-parc} and \texttt{edbyw}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: rewritten; encapsulates \texttt{booktitle} and % \texttt{editor} for later processing} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Sept 17}{PWD: fix up several bugs} % Prior to version 3.81, the \textsl{Editor} or \textsl{Edited by} in % parentheses was meant to be capitalized, but this did not work properly. % Now the option \texttt{edcap} produces this, and default is not capitalized. % % Notes on \dtx{} options: % \begin{itemize} % \item % The following combinations are available through the \texttt{makebst.tex} interface: % \begin{verbatim} % ( % <default> % |edby ( |edbyx |edbyy|edbyw[edcap]) % |edby-par (|edcap|edbyx[edcap]|edbyy ) % |edby-parc(|edcap|edbyx ) % ) % \end{verbatim} % \item % \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, and \texttt{edby-parc} are mutually exclusive % and, except for the default, exhaustive. % \item % \texttt{edbyx}, \texttt{edbyw}, and \texttt{edbyy} are mutually exclusive % and, except for the default, exhaustive. % \item % \texttt{edcap} is independent of the above two groups of options. % \item % When parentheses need to be applied, we make sure that the respective % \dtx{} guard expressions are mutually exclusive. % It makes no sense for \texttt{edbyw} to be in effect if either of % \texttt{edby-par} or \texttt{edby-parc} is in effect. % \item % \texttt{makebst.tex} only activates \texttt{edcap} in certain cases, % but we do no checking here, applying it consistently to the % ``editor'' text entity. % \item % The code between \texttt{<!edpar>} and \verb+<edpar\|edparc>+ % \emph{must} match the corresponding code in \texttt{format.editors}. % This means that in the default case, formatting is controlled by % a \dtx{} mechanism entirely different from the other cases. % \item \texttt{ser-ed} has been added to suit AGU. Result of series plus % volume to go between booktitle and editors; must remove \texttt{format.bvolume} % from \texttt{incollection} and \texttt{inproceedings}. % \end{itemize} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} { format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { %<showstack>% btitle %<*ser-ed> format.bvolume duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { ", " swap$ * * } if$ %</ser-ed> editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { %<*!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)> %<showstack>% btitle ednms %<!edpar&!edparxc> "," * " " * get.bbl.editor %<bkedcap> capitalize %<edpar> "(" swap$ * "), " * %<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)> "(" swap$ * ") " * %<!edpar&!(edparc|edparxc)> ", " * * swap$ %<showstack>% eds btitle %</!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)> %<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc> %<showstack>% btitle ednms %<edbyx|edbyy|edbyw> get.bbl.editor %<!(edbyx|edbyy|edbyw)> bbl.edby %<edcap> capitalize %<!(edby-par|edby-parc)&edbyw> "(" swap$ * ")" * %<showstack>% btitle ednms ed %<(edby-par|edby)&edbyy> swap$ "," * " " * swap$ * %<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed %<(edby-par|edby-parc)&!edbyw> "(" swap$ * ")" * swap$ %<edby|edby-parc> "," * " " * swap$ %</edby|edby-par|edby-parc> %<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed (or ednms-ed btitle) * } if$ %<showstack>% btitle-ednms-ed (or ednms-ed-btitle) (or btitle) word.in swap$ * } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`empty.misc.check'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} { author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ and and and and and %<!seq-no|alph> key empty$ not and { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } 'skip$ if$ } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.thesis.type'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} { type duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { swap$ pop$ "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.tr.number'} % \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Encapsulate number} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.tr.number} { number "number" bibinfo.check type duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ bbl.techrep } 'skip$ if$ "type" bibinfo.check swap$ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "t" change.case$ } { tie.or.space.prefix * * } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.article.crossref'} %\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{journal} with % \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate journal for further processing.} % The \texttt{journal} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be % done by command. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} { %<*!ay> key duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ journal duplicate$ empty$ { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ } { "journal" bibinfo.check emphasize word.in swap$ * } if$ } { word.in swap$ * " " *} if$ %</!ay> %<ay> word.in %<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * %<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" * } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.crossref.editor'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: editor encapsulated for later processing} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: fixed typo: "etal_rm"->"etal-rm"} % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} { editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check editor num.names$ duplicate$ #2 > { pop$ %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check " " * bbl.etal %<etal-it> emphasize * %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> "others" 't := } { #2 < 'skip$ { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = { %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check " " * bbl.etal %<etal-it> emphasize * %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font %<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> "others" 't := } { %<*!harnm> %<!amper> bbl.and space.word %<amper> " \& " %</!harnm> %<harnm> " \harvardand\ " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check * } if$ } if$ } if$ %<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm> t "others" = 'skip$ { bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check } if$ %</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm> } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.book.crossref'} %\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{series} with % \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate volume and series for % further processing.} % The \texttt{series} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be % done by command. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} { volume duplicate$ empty$ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ pop$ word.in } { bbl.volume %<!(blk-com|blk-tita)> capitalize swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word * } if$ %<*!ay> editor empty$ editor field.or.null author field.or.null = or { key empty$ { series empty$ { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ "" * } { series emphasize * } if$ } { key * } if$ } { format.crossref.editor * } if$ %</!ay> %<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * %<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" * } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.incoll.inproc.crossref'} %\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{booktitle} with % \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.booktitle}} % The \texttt{booktitle} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be % done by command. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} { %<*!ay> editor empty$ editor field.or.null author field.or.null = or { key empty$ { format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ } { word.in swap$ * } if$ } { word.in key * " " *} if$ } { word.in format.crossref.editor * " " *} if$ %</!ay> %<ay> word.in %<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * %<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" * } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.org.or.pub'} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Add option \texttt{add-pub} which makes use % of this function} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Add option \texttt{pub-par} to put publisher % in parentheses} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{pub-date} to put publisher % and date in parentheses together} % \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Add \texttt{add.blank} for \texttt{pub-par}} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add extra label with \texttt{pub-date}} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Option \texttt{pub-nopar} to suppress parentheses % with \texttt{pub-date}} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Change to include organization if present} % \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Include \texttt{dtbf} option with \texttt{pub-date}} % Psychology journals often want \textit{address}: \textit{publisher}. % % \textsl{Nature} wants publisher and date in parentheses, and when both % are there, they are merged into one set. % % Call function \texttt{add.blank} before parentheses so suppress preceding % punctuation, which looks strange when publisher in parentheses. % % MPG Jahrbuch wants publisher and year, but without parentheses. Add % \texttt{pub-nopar} to be used with \texttt{pub-date}. % % Have now (3.87.h) extended this function to include the organization, if % present. This is for \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings} where % the publisher is optional, and organization too. If the publisher is missing, % but the organization present, it is formatted like the publisher. This % complication comes from styles that want the publisher/organization to have % the date included, all in parentheses. % % This function is called by \texttt{format.publisher.address} and % \texttt{format.organization.address}, each putting the appropriate text % into the stack first. % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate address and year for % further processing.} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub} { 't := "" %<*pub-date&!ay> year empty$ { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } 'skip$ if$ %</pub-date&!ay> %<*!(pub-date&ay)> address empty$ t empty$ and %<pub-date> year empty$ and 'skip$ { %</!(pub-date&ay)> %<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)> add.blank "(" * %<*add-pub> address "address" bibinfo.check * t empty$ 'skip$ %</add-pub> %<*!add-pub> t empty$ { address "address" bibinfo.check * } { t * address empty$ 'skip$ { ", " * address "address" bibinfo.check * } if$ } %</!add-pub> %<*add-pub> { address empty$ 'skip$ { ": " * } if$ t * } %</add-pub> if$ %<*pub-date&!ay> year empty$ 'skip$ { t empty$ address empty$ and 'skip$ { ", " * } if$ year "year" bibinfo.check %<dtbf> bolden * } if$ %</pub-date&!ay> %<*pub-date&ay> year duplicate$ empty$ %<*!blkyear> { "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$ pop$ "????" } %</!blkyear> %<*blkyear> { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ pop$ "" } %</blkyear> %<!dtbf> { "year" bibinfo.check extra.label * } %<dtbf> { "year" bibinfo.check bolden extra.label * } if$ t empty$ address empty$ and { * } %<!pub-xc> { ", " swap$ * * } %<pub-xc> { " " swap$ * * } if$ %</pub-date&ay> %<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)> ")" * %<*!(pub-date&ay)> } if$ %</!(pub-date&ay)> } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.publisher.address'} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Add macro; works with \texttt{format.org.or.pub}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate \texttt{publisher} % and \texttt{organization}} % \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 28}{Check with \texttt{bibinfo.warn}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.publisher.address} { publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`format.organization.address'} % \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Add macro; works with \texttt{format.org.or.pub}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.organization.address} { organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`name.or.dash'} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Add function to replace repeated names by dash} % \changes{4.06}{2003 Apr 2}{Add double and triple dashes} % This function stores what is on the stack, compares it with previous value, % and replaces it with a long dash if they are equal. What is on the stack % should be author or editor names for the current entry. % \begin{macrocode} %<*nmdash> STRINGS {oldname} FUNCTION {name.or.dash} { 's := oldname empty$ { s 'oldname := s } { s oldname = %<*!au-col> %<!nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---" } %<nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---{}---" } %<nmd-3> { "---{}---{}---" } %</!au-col> %<*au-col> %<!nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---" add.blank } %<nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---{}---" add.blank } %<nmd-3> { "---{}---{}---" add.blank } %</au-col> { s 'oldname := s } if$ } if$ } %</nmdash> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`article'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Add option \texttt{yrp-x} to suppress % punctuation following date at beginning} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 8}{Add option \texttt{yrp-col} to add colon after % date at beginning} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{jxper} to remove periods % from journal name} % \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add option \texttt{dt-jnl} to make date part of % the journal specification, follows journal name.} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add option \texttt{au-col}} % \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Add option \texttt{jttl-rm}} % \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Put \texttt{purify\$} before \texttt{emphasize}} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Add option \texttt{blk-tita} for article only} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Add option \texttt{blknt} for period before notes} % \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{injnl} for `in' with journal % names} % % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.journal} and % \texttt{format.journal.eid}; call \texttt{format.eprint}, and % \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Fix bug with texttt{injnl}} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {article} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<*dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> format.date "year" output.check date.block %</dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*!jtit-x> format.title "title" output.check %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*blk-tit|blk-tita> %<!tit-col> new.sentence %<tit-col> add.colon %</blk-tit|blk-tita> %</!jtit-x> crossref missing$ { journal %<jxper> remove.dots "journal" bibinfo.check %<!jttl-rm> emphasize %<injnl> word.in swap$ * "journal" output.check %<jnm-x> add.blank %<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> format.date "year" output.check date.block %</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> format.vol.num.pages output %<doi&agu-doi> format.doi output %<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> } { format.article.crossref output.nonnull %<!pp-last> format.pages output } if$ %<*pp-last> eid empty$ { format.journal.pages } { format.journal.eid } if$ %</pp-last> %<issn> format.issn output %<doi&!agu-doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<*revdata> format.url output %</revdata> fin.entry %<harnm|url-nl> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`book'} %\changes{2.0a}{1994 Aug 30}{Fix up \texttt{new.sentence} so not added with % \texttt{blk-com}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {book} { output.bibitem author empty$ { format.editors "author and editor" output.check %<ay> editor format.key output %<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)&!au-col> add.blank %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash } { format.authors output.nonnull %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash crossref missing$ { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } 'skip$ if$ } if$ %<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check crossref missing$ { format.bvolume output %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %<!numser> format.number.series output %<pre-edn> format.edition output %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output %<pg-bk&pg-pre> format.book.pages output format.publisher.address output } { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon format.book.crossref output.nonnull %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&pub-date> format.date "year" output.check } if$ %<!pre-edn> format.edition output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<isbn> format.isbn output %<pg-bk&!pg-pre> format.book.pages output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`booklet'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {booklet} { output.bibitem format.authors output %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.title "title" output.check %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output address "address" bibinfo.check output %<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output %<isbn> format.isbn output %<pg-bk> format.book.pages output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date output %</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`inbook'} % \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Use \texttt{format.date} in place of % \texttt{year} alone} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % The medical journals, with option \texttt{dt-jnl}, have the date as part of % the journal specification. For chapters in books, they want date and pages % to appear at the end, with a space between them. (For journals, there is to be % no space.) Suppress the chapter specification (for now). % % The \texttt{dt-jnl} option usually behaves as the default, except for some % special entries, like this one. % % \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Restore chap specification with \texttt{dt-jnl} option.} % Restore the chapter specification (2004 Feb 9) after someone complained. % There are still some bugs here. If some date punctuation is specified, say % with \texttt{yrp-semi} for a semi-colon after the year, this appears always, % even if there is no text following. But then this to be an unlikely wish anyway, % since such punctuation options are best suited for \texttt{dt-beg}. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {inbook} { output.bibitem author empty$ { format.editors "author and editor" output.check %<ay> editor format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash } { format.authors output.nonnull %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash crossref missing$ { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } 'skip$ if$ } if$ %<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check crossref missing$ { %<pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output %<pre-pub> format.publisher.address output format.bvolume output %<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check %</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %<!numser> format.number.series output %<pre-edn> format.edition output %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<!pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output %<!pre-pub> format.publisher.address output } { %<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check %</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon format.book.crossref output.nonnull %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&pub-date> format.date "year" output.check } if$ %<!pre-edn> format.edition output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<*isbn> crossref missing$ { format.isbn output } 'skip$ if$ %</isbn> %<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check date.block %</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> %<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`incollection'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} % \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Restore chap specification with \texttt{dt-jnl} option.} FUNCTION {incollection} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*!jtit-x> format.title "title" output.check %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %</!jtit-x> crossref missing$ { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check %<bt-qq> end.quote.btitle %<pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output %<pre-pub> format.publisher.address output %<!ser-ed> format.bvolume output %<!numser> format.number.series output %<pre-edn> format.edition output format.chapter.pages output %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<!pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output %<!pre-pub> format.publisher.address output %<!pre-edn> format.edition output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<isbn> format.isbn output } { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull format.chapter.pages output } if$ %<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check date.block %</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> %<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`inproceedings'} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Reorganize organization/publisher} % \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 5}{Fix extraneous page output without % \texttt{pp-last}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.05}{2002 Oct 21}{Fix bug with \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-beg}} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {inproceedings} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*!jtit-x> format.title "title" output.check %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %</!jtit-x> crossref missing$ { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check %<bt-qq> end.quote.btitle %<*!pre-pub> %<!ser-ed> format.bvolume output %<!numser> format.number.series output %<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output %</!pre-pub> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output publisher empty$ { format.organization.address output } { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output format.publisher.address output } if$ %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<*pre-pub> format.bvolume output %<!numser> format.number.series output %<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output %</pre-pub> %<isbn> format.isbn output %<issn> format.issn output } { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull %<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output } if$ %<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last> %<!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<!pub-date> date.block %<jdt-v|jdt-vs|jdt-p|!jdt-pc> add.blank format.pages "pages" output.check %</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last> %<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`conference'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`manual'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> FUNCTION {manual} { output.bibitem format.authors output author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> organization address new.block.checkb organization "organization" bibinfo.check output address "address" bibinfo.check output format.edition output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } %</ay> %<*!ay> FUNCTION {manual} { output.bibitem author empty$ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ { output address "address" bibinfo.check output } if$ } { format.authors output.nonnull } if$ %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon author empty$ { organization empty$ { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> address new.block.checka address "address" bibinfo.check output } 'skip$ if$ } { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> organization address new.block.checkb organization "organization" bibinfo.check output address "address" bibinfo.check output } if$ format.edition output %<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date output %</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`mastersthesis'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Feb 7}{Add \texttt{thtit-a} to format thesis titles like % articles instead of books.} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: school via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call % \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add \texttt{thtit-x}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % To format a master's thesis. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {mastersthesis} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*!thtit-x> %<!thtit-a> format.btitle %<thtit-a> format.title "title" output.check %<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %</!thtit-x> bbl.mthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull school "school" bibinfo.warn output address "address" bibinfo.check output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`misc'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {misc} { output.bibitem format.authors output %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output %<*ay> %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.title output %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %</ay> %<*!ay> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> title howpublished new.block.checkb format.title output %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> howpublished new.block.checka %</!ay> howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output %<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date output %</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url %<!ay> empty.misc.check } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`phdthesis'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Feb 7}{Add \texttt{thtit-a} to format thesis titles like % articles instead of books.} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: school via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call % \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add \texttt{thtit-x}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % To format a doctoral thesis. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {phdthesis} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<*!thtit-x> %<!thtit-a> format.btitle %<thtit-a> format.title "title" output.check %<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %</!thtit-x> bbl.phdthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull school "school" bibinfo.warn output address "address" bibinfo.check output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`presentation'} % \begin{macrocode} %<*pres> FUNCTION {presentation} { output.bibitem format.authors output %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.title output %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check month "month" output.check year "year" output.check %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output new.sentence type missing$ 'skip$ {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output} if$ %<*url-blk&!harnm> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm> fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } %</pres> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`proceedings'} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \changes{4.16}{2006 Feb 15}{For numerical, the number/series could be missing when editor there; fixed} % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> FUNCTION {proceedings} { output.bibitem format.editors output editor format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check format.bvolume output %<!numser> format.number.series output %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output publisher empty$ { format.organization.address output } { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output format.publisher.address output } if$ %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<isbn> format.isbn output %<issn> format.issn output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } %</ay> %<*!ay> FUNCTION {proceedings} { output.bibitem editor empty$ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output } { format.editors output.nonnull } if$ %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.btitle "title" output.check format.bvolume output %<!numser> format.number.series output editor empty$ { publisher empty$ %<numser> { format.number.series output } { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output format.publisher.address output } if$ } { publisher empty$ { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output format.organization.address output } { %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence %<numser> format.number.series output organization "organization" bibinfo.check output format.publisher.address output } if$ } if$ %<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check %<isbn> format.isbn output %<issn> format.issn output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`techreport'} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 4}{Add option \texttt{trtit-b}} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{trnum-it}} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: institution via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call % \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {techreport} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<trtit-b> format.btitle %<!trtit-b> format.title "title" output.check %<!trtit-b&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence %<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon %<!trnum-it> format.tr.number output.nonnull %<trnum-it> format.tr.number emphasize output.nonnull institution "institution" bibinfo.warn output address "address" bibinfo.check output %<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note output %<*!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date "year" output.check %</!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`unpublished'} % \changes{3.85}{1997 Nov 25}{Fix date at normal end} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.} % \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {unpublished} { output.bibitem format.authors "author" output.check %<ay> author format.key output %<au-col> add.colon %<nmdash> name.or.dash %<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output %<dt-beg> date.block %<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.title "title" output.check %<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title %<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check %<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output %<doi> format.doi output %<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.url output %</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block %<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence format.note "note" output.check %<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date output %</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block format.date output %</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> %<eprint> format.eprint output %<revdata> format.url output fin.entry %<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`default.type'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} READ % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay|alph|!seq-no> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`sortify'} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Do not allow unsorted alphas} % In \texttt{btxbst.doc}/\texttt{.mbs}, the \texttt{sortify} function is % left out for unsorted alpha-style citations. This leads to an error, % because it is still used. So leave it in here too. \emph{In fact, do away % with unsorted alpha style, since it is as useless as unsorted author--year % listings.} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {sortify} { purify$ "l" change.case$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { len } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`chop.word'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {chop.word} { 's := 'len := s #1 len substring$ = { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } 's if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`format.lab.names'} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add option \texttt{alph} for \texttt{alpha.bst} % style of labels} % \changes{3.84}{1997 Nov 4}{Add options \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f}} % \changes{3.85}{1997 Dec 1}{Add option \texttt{jnrlab}} % \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font} % The function \texttt{format.lab.names} formats by author--year or the % \texttt{alpha} style as in the original \texttt{alpha.bst}. % Only major difference is that there should be no unsorted (\texttt{seq-no}) % versions of this. Patashnik was clearly very unhappy about accommodating % such an animal, and in fact, his unsorted alpha style crashes \btx. % I also provide the \texttt{vonx} option here to ignore the \textsl{von} % part of the name. % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { et.al.char.used } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used} { #0 'et.al.char.used := } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {format.lab.names} { 's := %<*alf-1> %<!vonx> s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ %<vonx> s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ text.length$ #2 < { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ } 'skip$ if$ %</alf-1> %<*!alf-1&alf-f> %<!vonx> s #1 "{vv{}}{ll}" format.name$ %<vonx> s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ %</!alf-1&alf-f> %<*!alf-1&!alf-f> s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames #1 > { numnames #4 > { #3 'namesleft := } { numnames 'namesleft := } if$ #1 'nameptr := "" { namesleft #0 > } { nameptr numnames = { s nameptr "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = { "{\etalchar{+}}" * #1 'et.al.char.used := } %<!vonx> { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } %<vonx> { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * } if$ } %<!vonx> { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } %<vonx> { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * } if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ numnames #4 > { "{\etalchar{+}}" * #1 'et.al.char.used := } 'skip$ if$ } %<!vonx> { s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ %<vonx> { s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ text.length$ #2 < { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ } 'skip$ if$ } if$ %</!alf-1&!alf-f> } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others'' % from last format function} % The function for the standard citation: one or two authors cited full, but for % more than two, only the first with \emph{et~al.} given. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay&!mcite> FUNCTION {format.lab.names} { 's := "" 't := %<!jnrlab> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<*jnrlab> %<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ %<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ %</jnrlab> %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font s num.names$ duplicate$ #2 > { pop$ %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * %<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<lab&!and-rm> "others" 't := } { #2 < 'skip$ { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = { % %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * %<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<lab&!and-rm> "others" 't := } %<*!harnm> %<*!amper> { bbl.and space.word * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font * } %</!amper> %<*amper> { " \& " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font * } %</amper> %</!harnm> %<*harnm> { " \harvardand{} " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font * } %</harnm> if$ } if$ } if$ %<*lab&!and-rm> t "others" = 'skip$ { cite.name.font } if$ %</lab&!and-rm> } %</ay&!mcite> % \end{macrocode} % % \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 23}{Add citations with more than one author with \emph{et~al.}} % \changes{4.20}{2007 Apr 24}{Select number of authors before truncating} % The code for formating author--year citations with more than one author % before \emph{et al.} or selecting a number other than two for truncating, % is much the same as the \texttt{format.full.names} function. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay&mcite> FUNCTION {format.lab.names} {'s := "" 't := #1 'nameptr := s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames 'namesleft := { namesleft #0 > } { s nameptr %<!jnrlab> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ %<*jnrlab> %<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ %<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ %</jnrlab> %<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font 't := nameptr #1 > { %<mct-1> nameptr #2 = %<mct-2> nameptr #3 = %<mct-3> nameptr #4 = %<mct-4> nameptr #5 = %<mct-5> nameptr #6 = %<mct-x2> numnames #2 > and %<mct-x3> numnames #3 > and %<mct-x4> numnames #4 > and %<mct-x5> numnames #5 > and { "others" 't := #1 'namesleft := } 'skip$ if$ namesleft #1 > { ", " * t * } { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = { 't := } { pop$ } if$ t "others" = { %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font %<*!etal-it> %<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * %<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * %</!etal-it> %<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * %<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font } { %<*!harnm> %<*!and-xcom> numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$ %</!and-xcom> %<!amper> bbl.and %<amper> "\&" %</!harnm> %<harnm> "\harvardand{}" space.word * t * } if$ } if$ } 't if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ %<*lab&!and-rm> t "others" = 'skip$ { cite.name.font } if$ %</lab&!and-rm> } %</ay&mcite> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`author.key.label'} % \begin{macro}{`author.editor.key.label'} % \begin{macro}{`author.key.organization.label'} % \begin{macro}{`editor.key.organization.label'} % \begin{macro}{`editor.key.label'} % Have to be very careful with the options \texttt{ay}, \texttt{alph}, and % \texttt{seq-no} here. The first two are actually mutually exclusive, and % \texttt{ay} should dominate. The \texttt{seq-no} option only applies for % numerical (\texttt{!ay}) but not alphabetic (\texttt{alph}) selections. % This whole block of coding dealing with labels is only included for % author--year or alphabetic or ordered numerical. % That is, \texttt{ay} or \texttt{alph} or \texttt{!seq-no} is true. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay|alph> FUNCTION {author.key.label} { author empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } %<ay> 'key %<!ay> { key #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { author format.lab.names } if$ } FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} { author empty$ { editor empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } %<ay> 'key %<!ay> { key #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { editor format.lab.names } if$ } { author format.lab.names } if$ } %</ay|alph> %<*!ay&alph> FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} { author empty$ { key empty$ { organization empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { key #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { author format.lab.names } if$ } FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} { editor empty$ { key empty$ { organization empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { key #3 text.prefix$ } if$ } { editor format.lab.names } if$ } %</!ay&alph> %<*ay> FUNCTION {editor.key.label} { editor empty$ { key empty$ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } 'key if$ } { editor format.lab.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`calc.short.authors'} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Add function to store short list of authors % for later test} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {calc.short.authors} { type$ "book" = type$ "inbook" = or 'author.editor.key.label { type$ "proceedings" = 'editor.key.label 'author.key.label if$ } if$ 'short.list := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`calc.label'} % \changes{1.5(2.3)a}{1994 Oct 11}{Add option \texttt{note-yr}} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Add options \texttt{lab-bf} and \texttt{lab-sc}} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Use \texttt{calc.short.authors}} % \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add \texttt{calc.label} from \texttt{alpha.bst}} % \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Add \texttt{keyxyr} option} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {calc.label} { calc.short.authors short.list %<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn)> "(" %<har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn> ", " * year duplicate$ empty$ %<keyxyr> short.list key field.or.null = or %<(blkyear|keyxyr)> { pop$ "" } %<!(blkyear|keyxyr)> { pop$ "????" } %<!note-yr> { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } %<note-yr> 'skip$ if$ * 'label := } %</ay> %<*!ay&alph> FUNCTION {calc.label} { type$ "book" = type$ "inbook" = or 'author.editor.key.label { type$ "proceedings" = 'editor.key.organization.label { type$ "manual" = 'author.key.organization.label 'author.key.label if$ } if$ } if$ duplicate$ year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #2 substring$ * 'label := year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ * sortify 'sort.label := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*har|cay|nmd|ast|cn> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`calc.short.label'} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Use \texttt{calc.short.authors}} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {calc.short.label} { calc.short.authors short.list 'label := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</har|cay|nmd|ast|cn> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`sort.format.names'} % \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Make ordering of `et al' works by year % and authors and not just year} % \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Option \texttt{nm-revf} to act just as default} % \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 16}{Add option \texttt{vonx} so sorting ignores the % \emph{von} part of the name} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{For limited authors, sort only on those present} % \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{`Et al' considered author before all others} % \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{`Et al' considered author after all others} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {sort.format.names} { 's := #1 'nameptr := "" s num.names$ 'numnames := numnames 'namesleft := { namesleft #0 > } { s nameptr %<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv> %<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" %<vonx> "{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" %</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv> %<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv> %<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" %<vonx> "{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" %</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv> format.name$ 't := nameptr #1 > { %<*nmlm> %<m1> nameptr #1 %<m2> nameptr #2 %<m3> nameptr #3 %<m4> nameptr #4 %<m5> nameptr #5 %<m6> nameptr #6 %<m7> nameptr #7 %<m8> nameptr #8 %<m9> nameptr #9 %<m0> nameptr #0 %<m10> #10 + %<m20> #20 + %<m30> #30 + %<m40> #40 + %<m50> #50 + %<m60> #60 + %<m70> #70 + %<m80> #80 + %<m90> #90 + #1 + = %<x1> numnames #1 %<x2> numnames #2 %<x3> numnames #3 %<x4> numnames #4 %<x5> numnames #5 %<x6> numnames #6 %<x7> numnames #7 %<x8> numnames #8 %<x9> numnames #9 %<x0> numnames #0 %<x10> #10 + %<x20> #20 + %<x30> #30 + %<x40> #40 + %<x50> #50 + %<x60> #60 + %<x70> #70 + %<x80> #80 + %<x90> #90 + > and { "others" 't := #1 'namesleft := } 'skip$ if$ %</nmlm> " " * namesleft #1 = t "others" = and { "zzzzz" * } %<*seq-lab|seq-key> { numnames #2 > nameptr #2 = and { "zz" * year field.or.null * " " * } 'skip$ if$ t sortify * } %</seq-lab|seq-key> %<!seq-lab&!seq-key> { t sortify * } if$ } { t sortify * } if$ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := } while$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`sort.format.title'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {sort.format.title} { 't := "A " #2 "An " #3 "The " #4 t chop.word chop.word chop.word sortify #1 global.max$ substring$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`author.sort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {author.sort} { author empty$ { key empty$ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" } { key sortify } if$ } { author sort.format.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`author.editor.sort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} { author empty$ { editor empty$ { key empty$ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" } { key sortify } if$ } { editor sort.format.names } if$ } { author sort.format.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`negate.year'} % \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add function for ordering by descending years} % This function negates the year by substituting each digit by its % complement. That is, 0 $\rightarrow$ 9, 1 $\rightarrow$ 8, etc. This is used % to provide ordering by descending year (latest year first). % \begin{macrocode} %<*seq-yrr&!seq-yr> FUNCTION {negate.year} { year empty$ { "99999" } { year #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ year #2 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ * year #3 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ * year #4 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ * } if$ } %</seq-yrr&!seq-yr> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`editor.sort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {editor.sort} { editor empty$ { key empty$ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" } { key sortify } if$ } { editor sort.format.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*seq-no> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { seq.num } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`init.seq'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {init.seq} { #0 'seq.num :=} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} EXECUTE {init.seq} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`int.to.fix'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {int.to.fix} { "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ * #-1 #10 substring$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</seq-no> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`presort'} % \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{seq-no} to author--year} % For unsorted author--year, make up the final sorting order in % \texttt{sort.label} with the original sequence number, for unsorting later. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {presort} { calc.label label sortify " " * %<*!seq-no> type$ "book" = type$ "inbook" = or 'author.editor.sort { type$ "proceedings" = 'editor.sort 'author.sort if$ } if$ #1 entry.max$ substring$ %</!seq-no> %<*seq-no> seq.num #1 + 'seq.num := seq.num int.to.fix %</seq-no> 'sort.label := sort.label * " " * %<seq-yr> " " * year field.or.null * %<seq-yrr&!seq-yr> " " * negate.year field.or.null * %<*!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> title field.or.null sort.format.title %</!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> %<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr> cite$ * #1 entry.max$ substring$ 'sort.key$ := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`author.organization.sort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} { author empty$ { organization empty$ { key empty$ { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" } { key sortify } if$ } { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } if$ } { author sort.format.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`editor.organization.sort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} { editor empty$ { organization empty$ { key empty$ { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" } { key sortify } if$ } { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } if$ } { editor sort.format.names } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`presort'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {presort} %<*alph> { calc.label sort.label " " * type$ "book" = %</alph> %<!alph>{ type$ "book" = type$ "inbook" = or 'author.editor.sort { type$ "proceedings" = 'editor.organization.sort { type$ "manual" = 'author.organization.sort 'author.sort if$ } if$ } if$ %<alph> * " " * %<seq-yrr> negate.year field.or.null sortify %<!seq-yrr> year field.or.null sortify %<!(seq-yr|seq-yrr)|alph> * " " * %<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!alph> swap$ * title field.or.null sort.format.title * #1 entry.max$ substring$ 'sort.key$ := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} ITERATE {presort} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} SORT % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay|alph|!seq-no> % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection{`forward.pass'} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Include number of references in argument to % \texttt{thebibliography} environment} % With version~6.0 of \texttt{natbib}, the author-year styles can also be % used for numerical citations; then the \texttt{thebibliography} environment % must have an argument indicating the length of the longest label. % Simply count the references and add this number as the argument. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} STRINGS { last.label next.extra } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`initialize.extra.label.stuff'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} { #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := "" 'next.extra := #0 'last.extra.num := #0 'number.label := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {forward.pass} { last.label label = { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := } { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := "" 'extra.label := label 'last.label := } if$ number.label #1 + 'number.label := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`initialize.longest.label'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} { "" 'longest.label := #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := "" 'next.extra := #0 'longest.label.width := #0 'last.extra.num := } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {forward.pass} { last.sort.label sort.label = { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := } { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := "" 'extra.label := sort.label 'last.sort.label := } if$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`reverse.pass'} % \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Put extra label in braces} % The extra label is added in braces so that natbib can treat it as one unit. % This allows extra labels to be more than one letter long. For non-NFSS % emphasizing, this is no problem, since labels go in |{\em a}|, but for % non-emphasizing and for NFSS, it caused troubles without the braces. % The trouble arises with multiple citations in one |\cite| in which % authors and years are the same, and only the extra label is given for % the next one. Note: |\emph{a}| is more than one letter long in this sense, % so it is not just a problem for more than 26 papers with same authors and % year. % % \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 17}{Add \texttt{\char`\\natexlab}} % The command |\natexlab| now encloses the extra label for \texttt{natbib} % styles. This command normally just prints its argument, but for numerical % citation mode, it swallows its argument. This allows the extra labels to % be suppressed for numerical citations where they are superfluous. % The enclosing braces mentioned above must be included here to make the % entire extra label text a single token for \texttt{natbib}. % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {reverse.pass} { next.extra "b" = { "a" 'extra.label := } 'skip$ if$ extra.label 'next.extra := extra.label %<xlab-it> emphasize %<*!html> duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * } if$ %</!html> 'extra.label := %<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|cn)> label extra.label * 'label := } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {reverse.pass} { next.extra "b" = { "a" 'extra.label := } 'skip$ if$ label extra.label * 'label := label width$ longest.label.width > { label 'longest.label := label width$ 'longest.label.width := } 'skip$ if$ extra.label 'next.extra := } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay&alph> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} %<ay>EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} %<!ay&alph>EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay|alph> ITERATE {forward.pass} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} REVERSE {reverse.pass} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay|alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*ay> FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} { sort.label " " * %<seq-yrr> negate.year field.or.null sortify %<!seq-yrr> year field.or.null sortify %<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!(seq-lab|seq-key)> swap$ * " " * %<*!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> title field.or.null sort.format.title %</!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> %<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr> cite$ * #1 entry.max$ substring$ 'sort.key$ := %<har|cay|nmd|cn|ast> calc.short.label } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} ITERATE {bib.sort.order} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} SORT % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</ay> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*!ay&!alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} STRINGS { longest.label } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} { "" 'longest.label := #1 'number.label := #0 'longest.label.width := } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} %<*!cite> { number.label int.to.str$ 'label := number.label #1 + 'number.label := %</!cite> %<cite>{ cite$ 'label := label width$ longest.label.width > { label 'longest.label := label width$ 'longest.label.width := } 'skip$ if$ } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} ITERATE {longest.label.pass} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} %</!ay&!alph> % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`begin.bib'} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{For \texttt{german}, add the definition of % {\tt\protect\bslash qq} to replace double-quote character.} % \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{For \texttt{babel}, read in file % \texttt{babelbst.tex} in \texttt{thebibliography} to define the word % commands.} % \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Add number of references as argument} % \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: provide default meanings for procedures used.} % The function \texttt{begin.bib} writes the initial text to the \texttt{.bbl} % file. The most important matter here is that the \texttt{thebibliography} % environment is invoked. % % Note: the French quotation marks are called `guillimets'; Adobe erroneously % named the symbols `guillimot', which is an arctic bird. The error has so % propagated, that it can no longer be corrected. \LaTeX\ took it over. % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {begin.bib} %<*!html> %<*!ay&alph> { et.al.char.used { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ } 'skip$ if$ preamble$ empty$ %</!ay&alph> %<ay|!alph>{ preamble$ empty$ 'skip$ { preamble$ write$ newline$ } if$ %<ay> "\begin{thebibliography}{" number.label int.to.str$ * "}" * %<!ay> "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ %<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$ "\typeout{WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING}" write$ newline$ "\typeout{The bst file has been generated with inconsistent options}" write$ newline$ "\typeout{Read the warning message at the start of the bst file}" write$ newline$ "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$ %</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> %<*!plntx> %<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{`#1'}" %<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{``#1''}" %</!plntx> %<*plntx> %<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s> "\def\enquote#1{`#1'}" %<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g> "\def\enquote#1{``#1''}" %</plntx> %<*!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g> %<!plntx> "\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%" %<plntx> "\def\guillemotleft{%" write$ newline$ " \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}}" write$ newline$ %<!plntx> "\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%" %<plntx> "\def\guillemotright{%" write$ newline$ " \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}}" write$ newline$ %<!plntx> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}" %<plntx> "\def\enquote#1{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}" %</!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g> %<!tit-it&tit-qq> write$ newline$ %<umlaut> "\let\qq=\" quote$ * write$ newline$ %<em-ul> "\expandafter\ifx\csname uline\endcsname\relax\let\uline\underline\fi" %<em-ul> write$ newline$ %<*ay> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\natexlab}[1]{#1}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\def\natexlab#1{#1}\fi" write$ newline$ %<*har> "{\catcode`\|=0\catcode`\#=12\catcode`\@=11\catcode`\\=12" write$ newline$ "|immediate|write|@auxout{\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\gdef\natexlab#1{#1}\fi}}" write$ newline$ %</har> %</ay> %<*nmft&nmft-def> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibnamefont}[1]{#1}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibnamefont\endcsname\relax" %<plntx> write$ newline$ %<plntx> " \def\bibnamefont#1{#1}\fi" write$ newline$ %</nmft&nmft-def> %<*nmft&fnm-def> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibfnamefont}[1]{#1}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibfnamefont\endcsname\relax" %<plntx> write$ newline$ %<plntx> " \def\bibfnamefont#1{#1}\fi" write$ newline$ %</nmft&fnm-def> %<*lab&lab-def> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\citenamefont}[1]{#1}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname citenamefont\endcsname\relax" %<plntx> write$ newline$ %<plntx> " \def\citenamefont#1{#1}\fi" write$ newline$ %</lab&lab-def> %<*(url&!harnm)|eprint> %<*!plntx> %<nfss> "\providecommand{\url}[1]{\texttt{#1}}" %<!nfss> "\providecommand{\url}[1]{{\tt #1}}" write$ newline$ "\providecommand{\urlprefix}{URL }" write$ newline$ %</!plntx> %<*plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname url\endcsname\relax" write$ newline$ %<nfss> " \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}\fi" %<!nfss> " \def\url#1{{\tt #1}}\fi" write$ newline$ "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlprefix\endcsname\relax\def\urlprefix{URL }\fi" write$ newline$ %</plntx> %</(url&!harnm)|eprint> %<*doi> "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlstyle\endcsname\relax" write$ newline$ %<*!plntx> " \providecommand{\doi}[1]{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\else" write$ newline$ " \providecommand{\doi}{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi" write$ newline$ %</!plntx> %<*plntx> " \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax" write$ newline$ " \def\doi#1{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\fi \else" write$ newline$ " \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax" write$ newline$ " \def\doi{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi \fi" write$ newline$ %</plntx> %</doi> %<*lang> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\selectlanguage}[1]{\relax}" %<*plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname selectlanguage\endcsname\relax" write$ newline$ " \def\selectlanguage#1{}\fi" %</plntx> write$ newline$ %</lang> %<*!plntx> %<*babel> "\input{babelbst.tex}" write$ newline$ "\newcommand{\Capitalize}[1]{\uppercase{#1}}" write$ newline$ "\newcommand{\capitalize}[1]{\expandafter\Capitalize#1}" write$ newline$ %</babel> %<*annote> "\providecommand{\bibAnnoteFile}[1]{%" write$ newline$ " \IfFileExists{#1}{\begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\" write$ newline$ " \textsc{Annotation:}\ \input{#1}\end{quotation}}{}}" write$ newline$ "\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[2]{%" write$ newline$ " \begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\" write$ newline$ " \textsc{Annotation:}\ #2\end{quotation}}" write$ newline$ %</annote> %</!plntx> %<*bibinfo> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibinfo\endcsname\relax\def\bibinfo#1#2{#2}\fi" write$ newline$ %</bibinfo> %<*eprint> %<!plntx> "\providecommand{\eprint}[2][]{\url{#2}}" %<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname eprint\endcsname\relax\def\eprint#1{\url{#1}}\fi" write$ newline$ %</eprint> } %</!html> %<*html> { "<html><head><title>Bibliography Listing" write$ newline$ "" write$ newline$ "

Bibliography

" write$ newline$ %"

" write$ newline$ } % % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} EXECUTE {begin.bib} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} EXECUTE {init.state.consts} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} ITERATE {call.type$} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{`end.bib'} % \begin{macrocode} FUNCTION {end.bib} { newline$ % "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ % "" write$ newline$ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} EXECUTE {end.bib} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} % % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} % % \end{macrocode} % % \section{The File \texttt{babelbst.tex} for English} % The following contains the definitions for the \texttt{babel} language % selection as they apply to English. This file may be extracted with % \dtx{} and the option \texttt{bblbst}. % \begin{macrocode} %<*bblbst> % This is babelbst.tex for English. % It should serve as a model for other languages. % Alternatively, store it under a different name (e.g. englbst.tex) % and then \input it with a command in babelbst.tex. \def\bbland{and} \def\bbletal{et~al.} \def\bbleditors{editors} \def\bbleds{eds.} \def\bbleditor{editor} \def\bbled{ed.} \def\bbledby{edited by} \def\bbledition{edition} \def\bbledn{edn.} \def\bblvolume{volume} \def\bblvol{vol.} \def\bblof{of} \def\bblnumber{number} \def\bblno{no.} \def\bblin{in} \def\bblpages{pages} \def\bblpp{pp.} \def\bblpage{page} \def\bblp{p.} \def\bbleidpp{pages} \def\bblchapter{chapter} \def\bblchap{chap.} \def\bbltechreport{Technical Report} \def\bbltechrep{Tech. Rep.} \def\bblmthesis{Master's thesis} \def\bblphdthesis{Ph.D. thesis} \def\bblfirst{First} \def\bblfirsto{1st} \def\bblsecond{Second} \def\bblsecondo{2nd} \def\bblthird{Third} \def\bblthirdo{3rd} \def\bblfourth{Fourth} \def\bblfourtho{4th} \def\bblfifth{Fifth} \def\bblfiftho{5th} \def\bblst{st} \def\bblnd{nd} \def\bblrd{rd} \def\bblth{th} \def\bbljan{January} \def\bblfeb{February} \def\bblmar{March} \def\bblapr{April} \def\bblmay{May} \def\bbljun{June} \def\bbljul{July} \def\bblaug{August} \def\bblsep{September} \def\bbloct{October} \def\bblnov{November} \def\bbldec{December} % % \end{macrocode} % % \Finale